WO2025223020A1 - Communication method and apparatuses, storage medium, and computer program product - Google Patents
Communication method and apparatuses, storage medium, and computer program productInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025223020A1 WO2025223020A1 PCT/CN2025/078893 CN2025078893W WO2025223020A1 WO 2025223020 A1 WO2025223020 A1 WO 2025223020A1 CN 2025078893 W CN2025078893 W CN 2025078893W WO 2025223020 A1 WO2025223020 A1 WO 2025223020A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- communication device
- information
- range
- area
- rate
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product.
- NR 5G New Radio
- R revision
- R19 revision
- NR standard protocol is a wireless communication technology designed for terrestrial cellular network scenarios, providing users with ultra-low latency, ultra-reliability, ultra-high speed, and massive connectivity wireless communication services.
- NTN non-terrestrial networks
- NTN communication features large coverage areas and flexible networking, achieving seamless global network coverage.
- NTN communication utilizes equipment such as drones, high-altitude platforms, and satellites to provide data transmission and voice communication services to user equipment (UE). Improving communication performance is currently a pressing issue that needs to be addressed.
- This application provides a communication method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product for determining whether to switch to a second communication device based on first information.
- This communication device switching scheme can save signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, and thereby improve communication performance.
- the terminal device can communicate with multiple communication devices.
- the terminal device may establish a radio resource control (RRC) connection with one communication device but not with other communication devices.
- the communication device with which the terminal device has an RRC connection can be called the primary communication device, and the communication devices without an RRC connection can be called secondary communication devices.
- the primary communication device and one or more secondary communication devices can send the same or different data to the same terminal device on the same resources.
- This scheme can improve the performance and/or throughput of the communication system.
- the terminal device may need to switch to a secondary satellite device. If the primary communication device needs to make a judgment and issue a switching command every time a secondary satellite device switches, it will result in high signaling overhead, thereby increasing the load on the primary communication device.
- this application provides a solution in which the terminal device can determine whether to switch communication devices based on first information.
- the first information can be used to determine the area served by the second communication device. If the terminal device determines, based on the first information, that the area served by the second communication device includes the area where the terminal device is located, it can then switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
- the terminal device determines whether to switch communication devices based on the first information, eliminating the need for the primary communication device to issue a switching command to the terminal device. This solution can save signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, and thereby improve communication performance.
- the second and third communication devices can improve communication performance by sending data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources).
- sending different data to the same terminal device on the same resources can improve data transmission efficiency and increase the throughput of the communication system.
- sending the same data to the same terminal device on the same resources can improve the reliability of data transmission.
- this application provides a communication method that can be executed by a terminal device.
- the terminal device may include a terminal equipment or a chip system within the terminal equipment.
- the terminal device acquires first information.
- the first information is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the first information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes a first area, the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device, where the first area includes the area where the terminal device is located.
- the terminal device determines whether to switch to the second communication device based on the first information, the main communication device does not need to issue a switching command to the terminal device during this process.
- This scheme can save signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, and thus improve communication performance.
- the terminal device determines that it does not need to switch to the second communication device.
- the terminal device can continue to communicate with the first communication device, or continue to determine whether the area served by the next candidate auxiliary communication device includes the first area.
- the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device or the first communication device.
- the third communication device can be considered the primary communication device, and the first and second communication devices can be considered two secondary communication devices.
- the primary and secondary communication devices can send data to the terminal device, either individually or jointly.
- the primary and secondary communication devices can send data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources), and the data sent by the primary and secondary communication devices can be the same or different.
- This scheme can improve the performance and/or throughput of the communication system.
- the data and resources sent by the secondary communication devices to the terminal device can be notified by the primary communication device, by other devices, or determined by the secondary communication device according to preset rules.
- the primary and secondary communication devices can also send data to the terminal device on different resources (e.g., different time-domain and different frequency-domain resources).
- the terminal device receives first data and second data, the first data comes from a second communication device, the second data comes from a third communication device, the first data occupies a first resource, and the second data occupies a first resource.
- the first data and the second data can be the same or different.
- the first resource may include/be a time-domain resource or a frequency-domain resource.
- the first resource may include/be a time-domain resource and a frequency-domain resource.
- the second communication device and the third communication device send data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources).
- communication performance can be improved.
- the second communication device and the third communication device send different data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources)
- data transmission efficiency can be improved, increasing the throughput of the communication system.
- the second communication device and the third communication device send the same data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources)
- data transmission reliability can be improved.
- the first information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information (e.g., current time); information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the timing advance (TA) of the second communication device.
- time information e.g., current time
- TA timing advance
- This information is readily available to the terminal device, thereby reducing the complexity of the solution.
- the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device based on the time information. This solution reduces the hardware requirements of the terminal device and is applicable to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (e.g., no positioning function).
- the information associated with the position of the second communication device includes: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device; and/or, the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device.
- the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device includes the angle between a line originating from the terminal device and directed toward the second communication device and the projection of that line onto a horizontal plane.
- the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device includes: the angle between a line connecting a point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device, and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device.
- the information associated with the Doppler of the signal from the second communication device includes: the corresponding Doppler of the second communication device; and/or, the Doppler rate of the second communication device.
- the information associated with the TA of the second communication device includes at least one of the following: the TA corresponding to the second communication device; the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device; and the rate of change of the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device.
- the terminal device determines that the area where the first information instructs the second communication device to provide services includes the first area. In another possible implementation, if the first information does not satisfy the first condition, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information instructs the second communication device to provide services does not include the first area.
- the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the second TA change rate range.
- the terminal device can determine whether to switch to an auxiliary communication device based on a comparison of the first information with some parameter ranges or time periods.
- the first information is relatively easy for the terminal device to obtain, thus reducing the complexity of the solution.
- the terminal device can determine whether to switch to an auxiliary communication device based on time information. This solution reduces the hardware requirements of the terminal device and is applicable to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (e.g., without positioning functionality).
- the terminal device receives first configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range.
- the first configuration information further includes: ephemeris information of the second communication device, and/or location information of a ground reference point.
- the location information of the ground reference point is used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device.
- the ephemeris information can assist the terminal device in determining whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device.
- the ground reference point can be a relatively central point in a region.
- the first configuration information further indicates that the first communication device has a higher priority than the second communication device, and the second communication device is the highest priority communication device to be switched after the first communication device.
- the priority of the third communication device can be set according to the order in which each communication device provides services to the first area, or it can refer to other information, such as the signal quality of each communication device, to set its priority.
- the terminal device can sequentially determine whether each candidate auxiliary communication device can be successfully switched based on the priority information of each candidate auxiliary communication device indicated by the first configuration information. This scheme allows the terminal device to determine the target auxiliary communication device as quickly as possible, thereby improving the efficiency of the communication system.
- the terminal device acquires second information to determine the area where the first communication device provides service now or after a first duration. Before switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, the terminal device further determines that the area where the first communication device, indicated by the second information, provides service does not include the first area. In another possible implementation, if the area where the first communication device, indicated by the second information, provides service includes the first area, the terminal device can determine that it is not necessary to switch the secondary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
- the terminal device needs to determine whether to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device when it is determined that the first communication device is currently or about to be unable to provide service to the first area.
- This scheme can maximize the time that the first communication device provides service to the terminal device, thereby reducing the frequency of switching auxiliary communication devices and saving resource costs.
- the second information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the first communication device; time information (e.g., current time or time after a first duration); information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device; and information associated with the TA of the first communication device.
- the information associated with the position of the first communication device includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device; and the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device.
- the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device includes the angle between a line originating from the terminal device and directed toward the first communication device and the projection of that line onto a horizontal plane.
- the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device includes the angle between a line connecting a point on the orbit of the first communication device and the center of the orbit of the first communication device, and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the first communication device and the center of the orbit of the first communication device.
- the information associated with the Doppler of the signal from the first communication device includes at least one of the following: the corresponding Doppler of the first communication device; and the corresponding Doppler rate of the first communication device.
- the information associated with the TA of the first communication device includes at least one of the following: the TA corresponding to the first communication device; the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the first communication device; and the rate of change of the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the first communication device.
- the second information terminal device is relatively easy to obtain, thus reducing the complexity of the solution.
- the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device based on time information.
- This solution can reduce the hardware capability requirements of the terminal device and can be applied to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (such as those without positioning functions).
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area.
- the second condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information belongs to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler effect corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a third TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a fourth TA change rate range.
- the inability of the second information to satisfy the second condition may include at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the second information does not belong to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler frequency corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second Doppler frequency range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second Doppler rate range; the TA frequency corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second TA frequency range; the TA frequency change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the third TA frequency change rate range; and the TA frequency change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the fourth TA frequency change rate
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information includes the first area. In this case, the terminal device can determine that there is no need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
- the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device by: the terminal device ceasing to receive synchronization signals from the first communication device. This can save on the terminal device's resource and power consumption.
- the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device, including/compromising that the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the second communication device, the synchronization signal being used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the second communication device. In this way, the terminal device can transmit data with the second communication device.
- the terminal device can transmit data with the first communication device before switching from the first communication device. For example, before switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the first communication device, which is used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the first communication device.
- the terminal device receives data from the first communication device on a second resource, and also receives data from a third communication device on the second resource. This can improve communication throughput.
- the data sent to the terminal device by the third communication device and the first communication device can be the same or different.
- the resources occupied by the third communication device and the first communication device for sending data to the terminal device can be the same (same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources) or different (different time-domain resources and different frequency-domain resources).
- the third communication device may include a network device or a chip system within a network device.
- the third communication device may include a satellite device or a chip (or chip system) within a satellite device.
- the third communication device may include a ground station or a chip (or chip system) within a ground station.
- the ground station may, for example, include network equipment (e.g., access network equipment) deployed on the ground.
- the third communication device acquires third information, which is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the third information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes a first area, the third communication device determines that the terminal device is switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, where the first area includes the area where the terminal device is located.
- the terminal device determines whether to switch to the second communication device based on the first information, and the third communication device determines whether the terminal device should switch to the second communication device based on the third information
- the third communication device and the terminal device each determine whether the terminal device should switch to the second communication device based on the information used to determine the area provided by the second communication device.
- this process there is no need for the main communication device to issue a switching command to the terminal device, and this scheme can save signaling overhead.
- the third communication device determines that the terminal device does not need to switch to the second communication device when the third information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
- the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device, nor with the first communication device.
- the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device, nor with the first communication device.
- the third communication device sends second data to the terminal device using the first resource, and the first resource is also used by the second communication device to send first data to the terminal device.
- the third information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information (e.g., current time); information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the TA of the second communication device.
- time information e.g., current time
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device e.g., information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device.
- information associated with the TA of the second communication device e.g., current time
- the contents of the third information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
- the third communication device determines that the area in which the third information instructs the second communication device to provide services includes the first area. In another possible implementation, if the third information does not satisfy the first condition, the third communication device determines that the area in which the third information instructs the second communication device to provide services does not include the first area.
- the content of the first condition can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
- the third information satisfies the first condition including at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the third information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
- the third communication device sends first configuration information.
- the details and benefits of the first configuration information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
- the third communication device sends second configuration information to the second communication device.
- the second configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first region, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range.
- the second configuration information can be associated with the first region.
- the second configuration information may also include information for indicating the first region.
- the second configuration information is used by the second communication device to determine the timing for sending a synchronization signal to the first region. For example, when the second communication device determines that one or more of the second configuration information is satisfied, it can begin sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period).
- the second communication device when it determines that one or more of the second configuration information cannot be satisfied, it can stop sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period; or, for example, the second communication device can periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a third duration as the period, where the third duration can be longer than the second duration). It can be seen that in these schemes, with the assistance of the second configuration information, the third communication device can control the number and frequency of synchronization signals sent to the first region, avoiding the need for continuously sending synchronization signals to the first region at a high frequency, thus saving resource overhead.
- the third communication device acquires sixth information, which is used to determine the area where the first communication device provides service now or after a first duration. Before the terminal device switches to the second communication device, the third communication device determines that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area. In another possible implementation, if the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information includes the first area, the third communication device can determine that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device. In this scheme, the third communication device needs to determine that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device when it determines that the first communication device is currently or will soon be unable to provide service to the first area. This scheme can maximize the time that the first communication device provides service to the terminal device, thereby reducing the frequency of auxiliary communication device switching and saving resource costs.
- the sixth information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the first communication device; time information (e.g., current time or time after a first duration); information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device; and information associated with the TA of the first communication device.
- time information e.g., current time or time after a first duration
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device e.g., current time or time after a first duration
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device e.g., current time or time after a first duration
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device e.g., current time or time after a first duration
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device e.g., current time or time after a first duration
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device e.g., current time or time after a first duration
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device e.
- the third communication device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area. In another possible implementation, if the sixth information satisfies the second condition, the third communication device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information includes the first area. In this case, the third communication device determines that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
- the contents of the second condition can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
- the sixth information failing to satisfy the second condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the sixth information does not belong to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the third TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the fourth TA change rate range.
- the second communication device may include a network device or a chip system within the network device.
- the second communication device may include a satellite device or a chip (or chip system) within the satellite device.
- the second communication device may include a ground station or a chip (or chip system) within the ground station.
- the ground station may, for example, include network equipment (e.g., access network equipment) deployed on the ground.
- the second communication device acquires fourth information, which is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the fourth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first area. Sending the synchronization signal to the first area may include: the second communication device starting to send the synchronization signal to the first area, or the second communication device periodically sending the synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration (which may be a shorter duration).
- this scheme can prevent the second communication device from continuously sending synchronization signals to the first area at a high frequency, thereby saving resource consumption, reducing interference in the communication system, and reducing the complexity of the scheme on the second communication device side.
- the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device, nor with the first communication device.
- the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device, nor with the first communication device.
- the second communication device transmits first data to the terminal device using the first resource, and the first resource is also used by the third communication device to transmit second data to the terminal device.
- the fourth information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information; information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the TA of the second communication device.
- the contents of the fourth information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
- the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first region when the fourth information satisfies the first condition.
- the details and benefits of the first condition can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
- the fourth information satisfies the first condition including at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fourth information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
- the second communication device determines that the area where the fourth information indicates the second communication device to provide services does not include the first area. It may not start sending a synchronization signal to the first area, or it may periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area with a third duration (the third duration is a relatively long duration, for example, the third duration is longer than the second duration).
- the second communication device acquires fifth information, which is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area, the second communication device determines to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area. This saves resource overhead.
- the second communication device can continuously send a synchronization signal to the first area, or periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration (which can be a shorter duration). This extends the service time for the terminal device, reduces the frequency of switching between auxiliary communication devices, and thus saves resource overhead.
- the second communication device determines to stop sending the synchronization signal to the first area. If the fifth information meets the first condition, the second communication device may continuously send the synchronization signal to the first area, or periodically send the synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (which may be a shorter duration).
- the second communication device after the second communication device determines to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area, it further includes at least one of the following: the second communication device stops sending synchronization signals to the first area; the second communication device stops periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration; the second communication device periodically sends synchronization signals to the first area with a third duration, the third duration being longer than the second duration. This can save resource consumption.
- the fifth information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information (e.g., current time); information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the TA of the second communication device.
- time information e.g., current time
- information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device e.g., information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device.
- information associated with the TA of the second communication device e.g., current time
- the contents of the fifth information can be found in the relevant descriptions of the possible implementations of the first aspect described above, and will not be repeated here.
- the fifth information not satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fifth information is not within the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the second TA change rate range.
- the second communication device receives second configuration information.
- the details and benefits of the second configuration information can be found in the description of possible implementations in the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
- a communication device which can be the aforementioned terminal device, third communication device, or second communication device.
- the communication device may include a communication unit and a processing unit to perform any one of the first to third aspects, or any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- the communication unit is used to perform functions related to transmission and reception.
- the communication unit may be referred to as a transceiver unit.
- the communication unit includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
- the communication device is a communication chip
- the processing unit may be one or more processors or processor cores
- the communication unit may be the input/output circuit, input/output interface, or antenna port of the communication chip.
- the communication unit can be a transmitter and a receiver, or the communication unit can be a transmitter and a receiver.
- the communication device may also include modules that can be used to perform any one of the first to third aspects described above, or to perform any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- a communication device which may be the aforementioned terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device.
- the communication device may include a processor and a memory to execute any one of the first to third aspects, or to execute any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- it may also include a transceiver, the memory for storing computer programs or instructions, and the processor for retrieving and executing the computer programs or instructions from the memory.
- the communication device executes any one of the first to third aspects, or to execute any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- processors there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the memory can be integrated with the processor, or the memory can be set up separately from the processor.
- the transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver.
- a communication device which may be the aforementioned terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device.
- the communication device may include a processor to execute any one of the first to third aspects, or to execute any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- the processor is coupled to a memory.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- the communication interface can be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
- the transceiver can be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface can be an input/output circuit.
- the communication interface can be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin, or related circuit on the chip or chip system.
- the processor can also be manifested as a processing circuit or logic circuit.
- a system which includes the aforementioned terminal device.
- the system may further include a third communication device, a second communication device, and a first communication device.
- a computer program product comprising: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when executed, causes a computer to perform any one of the first to third aspects described above, or to perform any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
- a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform any one of the first to third aspects described above, or to perform any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
- a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
- a tenth aspect provides a processing apparatus, comprising: an interface circuit and a processing circuit.
- the interface circuit may include an input circuit and an output circuit.
- the processing circuit is configured to receive signals through the input circuit and transmit signals through the output circuit, thereby enabling any one of the first to third aspects, or any possible implementation thereof, to be implemented.
- the aforementioned processing device can be a chip
- the input circuit can be an input pin
- the output circuit can be an output pin
- the processing circuit can be a transistor, gate circuit, flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc.
- the input signal received by the input circuit can be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
- the signal output by the output circuit can be, for example, but not limited to, output to a transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter.
- the input circuit and the output circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as the input circuit and output circuit at different times. This application does not limit the specific implementation method of the processor and various circuits.
- the communication device is a terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device.
- the interface circuit can be an RF processing chip in the terminal device, the third communication device, or the second communication device, and the processing circuit can be a baseband processing chip in the terminal device, the third communication device, or the second communication device.
- the communication device can be a component of a terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device, such as an integrated circuit product like a system-on-a-chip (SoC) or a communication chip.
- the interface circuit can be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pins, or related circuits on the chip or chip system.
- the processing circuit can be the logic circuit on the chip.
- Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application.
- Figure 1C is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application.
- Figure 1D is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application.
- Figure 1E is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application.
- Figure 1F is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application.
- Figure 1G is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application.
- FIG. 2 is a possible flowchart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of this application.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an elevation angle provided in an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a track angle provided in an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of Doppler and Doppler rate of change corresponding to a communication device provided in an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the arrival of information transmitted by multiple communication devices to a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application;
- Figure 7 is a schematic flowchart of a possible method for a terminal device to acquire data according to an embodiment of this application
- FIG. 8 is a possible flowchart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of another structure of the communication device provided in an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of another structure of the communication device provided in the embodiment of this application.
- the resources in the embodiments of this application may include, for example, time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources.
- Time-domain resources may include at least one of the following: radio frames, subframes, slots, mini slots, or symbols (e.g., orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM), such as discrete fourier transform (DFT) extended OFDM (DFT-spread OFDM, DFT-S-OFDM), orthogonal time-frequency and space (OTFS)).
- OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
- DFT discrete fourier transform
- DFT-spread OFDM DFT-spread OFDM
- DFT-S-OFDM orthogonal time-frequency and space
- a time-domain element may include a radio frame, a subframe, a slot, a mini slot, or an OFDM symbol.
- a time-domain element may also include resources aggregated from multiple radio frames, subframes, slots, mini slots, or OFDM symbols.
- a radio frame may include multiple subframes, a subframe may include one or more slots, and a slot may include at least one symbol.
- a radio frame may include multiple slots, and a slot may include at least one symbol.
- an OFDM symbol may also be simply referred to as a symbol.
- the length of each symbol can vary, and therefore the time slot length can also vary.
- a time slot with a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz has a length of 0.5 ms
- a time slot with a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz has a length of 0.125 ms, and so on.
- time domain unit can also be replaced by: time domain resource unit or time domain unit, etc.
- frequency domain resources can include one or more frequency domain units.
- a frequency domain unit can be a resource block (RB), a physical resource block (PRB), a subcarrier, a resource block group (RBG), a predefined subband, a precoding resource block group (PRG), a resource pool, a bandwidth part (BWP), a resource element (RE) (also called a resource unit or resource particle), a carrier, or a serving cell.
- PRBs and RBs can be interchanged.
- a resource pool can include one or more resources, which can include at least one of time-domain resources, frequency-domain resources, code-domain resources, or spatial-domain resources. The number and size of resources included in the resource pool can be predetermined or configured by signaling.
- Subcarrier or RE refers to the smallest frequency domain unit on a specific symbol in a multicarrier system.
- Subcarrier spacing is the interval between the center or peak positions of two adjacent subcarriers in the frequency domain in an OFDM system.
- various subcarrier spacings are introduced, and different carriers can have different subcarrier spacings.
- the baseline is 15kHz, which can be 15kHz ⁇ 2n, where n is an integer from 3.75, 7.5 up to 480kHz.
- RE can refer to a resource unit of time-frequency resources, for example, it can be considered as the smallest time-frequency resource unit.
- subcarrier and RE are interchangeable and have the same content.
- a subchannel is the smallest unit of frequency domain resources occupied by a physical cross-channel shared channel.
- a subchannel can include one or more resource blocks (RBs).
- the bandwidth of a wireless communication system in the frequency domain can include multiple RBs.
- the number of physical resource blocks (PRBs) included can be 6, 15, 25, 50, etc.
- an RB can include several subcarriers.
- an RB includes 12 subcarriers, where the spacing between each subcarrier can be 15kHz.
- other subcarrier spacings can also be used, such as 3.75kHz, 30kHz, 60kHz, or 120kHz subcarrier spacings, which are not limited here.
- a frequency domain unit may include a RE, an RB, a channel, a subchannel, a carrier, or a bandwidth part (BWP).
- a frequency domain unit may also include resources aggregated from multiple REs, multiple RBs, multiple subchannels, multiple carriers, or multiple BWPs.
- a channel can be equivalently replaced by a resource block set (RB set), and the frequency domain bandwidth of an RB set can be 20 MHz.
- the frequency domain unit can also be replaced by: frequency domain resource unit or frequency unit, etc.
- a frequency domain resource set may include one or more frequency domain elements.
- a frequency domain resource set may also be called a frequency domain resource collection, frequency domain resource group, etc.
- a frequency domain resource set may include a resource block set (RBset), an RB, a subchannel, a resource pool, a carrier, and a BWP.
- the reference signal in the embodiments of this application may include at least one of the following: positioning reference signal (PRS), sounding reference signal (SRS), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS), phase-tracking reference signals (PTRS), or synchronization signal and physical sidelink broadcast channel block (SSB).
- PRS positioning reference signal
- SRS sounding reference signal
- CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
- DMRS demodulation reference signal
- PTRS phase-tracking reference signals
- SSB physical sidelink broadcast channel block
- Satellite communication systems can be integrated with mobile communication systems.
- mobile communication systems can be 4th Generation (4G) communication systems (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication systems, 5th Generation (5G) communication systems (e.g., New Radio (NR) systems), and future mobile communication systems.
- 4G 4th Generation
- WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
- 5G 5th Generation
- NR New Radio
- Mobile communication systems can also be vehicle-to-everything (V2X) systems and Internet of Things (IoT) systems.
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- IoT Internet of Things
- Region e.g., the first region involved in the embodiments of this application: Unless otherwise specified, "region" in the following embodiments of this application refers to a geographical region. A region is fixed relative to the Earth, or it can be understood as a geographical region that is fixed relative to the Earth. For example, a region may have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographical location, etc.
- region can also have an altitude attribute, meaning a region can be understood as a geographical area at a given altitude or altitude range.
- a region can refer to a geographical area on the ground with an altitude of 0 kilometers (km) or an altitude around 0 km (e.g., within the range of [-2, 2] km), or a geographical area with a certain average altitude. Additionally, it can refer to geographical areas at other specific altitudes or altitude ranges, such as a geographical area with an altitude of 10 km, or a geographical area with an altitude around 10 km (e.g., within the range of [7, 13] km).
- the aforementioned region fixed relative to the Earth can also be referred to as a "wave position,” "geographical region,” etc.
- wave position a region fixed relative to the Earth
- geographical region a region fixed relative to the Earth.
- other names are also possible, and this application does not specifically limit the name of the region fixed relative to the Earth.
- Different regions may have the same or different shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas. Different regions may be geographically different. Different regions may or may not overlap.
- region fixed relative to the Earth can be understood as follows: the region's outline, size, or geographical location remains unchanged; for example, the region's outline, size, or geographical location does not change over time.
- region fixed relative to the Earth can be understood as follows: the region's outline and the points within it can be described using a fixed Earth coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the region's outline in the fixed Earth coordinate system remain constant.
- the shape of the region can be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc.
- the shape of the region can also be irregular, without limitation.
- the shape of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different shapes. The same network device can also define multiple region shapes. Similarly, the size, radius, and area of a region can also be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different sizes, radii, or areas. The same network device can also define multiple region sizes, multiple region radii, or multiple region areas.
- the Earth's surface can be divided into multiple regions, and these regions can be indexed (e.g., numbered). Terminal devices and network devices can agree on the numbering method for these regions (e.g., starting from 1 or 0) and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Alternatively, the protocol can define the numbering method for these regions and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Based on the region indexes, information such as the region's geographical location can be determined.
- the multiple regions can completely cover the Earth's surface, such that any location on the Earth's surface belongs to a certain region; or, the multiple regions can also cover part of the geographical location on Earth, for example, the multiple regions may not cover the Earth's South Pole and/or North Pole, that is, the South Pole and/or North Pole may not exist in the region.
- the method of dividing the network into multiple zones can be defined by a protocol or by the network device.
- Different network devices can define the same or different division methods.
- the same network device can also define multiple division methods.
- multiple grids can be defined to divide the Earth's surface. For example, a grid at an altitude of 0 km or within the range of [-2, 2] km can be divided into 1-degree latitude and longitude grids, generating 129,600 regions. At an altitude of 10 km or within the range of [7, 13] km, further division using 1-degree latitude and longitude grids generates another 129,600 regions. When indexing these regions, the index range needs to be expanded.
- the total index could be 0, 1, ..., 129,599, 129,600, 129,601, ..., 259,199, where the first 129,600 indices represent the region index at an altitude of 0 km or within the range of [-2, 2] km, and the last 129,600 indices represent the region index at an altitude of 10 km or within the range of [7, 13] km.
- the granularity of the latitude and longitude grid can be determined based on the type of network device. For instance, a relatively small granularity can be used for discretization when the network device is a LEO satellite, and a relatively large granularity can be used when the network device is a geosynchronous orbit (GEO) satellite.
- GEO geosynchronous orbit
- the Earth's surface can be divided using latitude and longitude grids of various granularities. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a portion of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees.
- the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree at an altitude of 0 km, and the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees at an altitude of 10 km.
- the Earth's surface can be divided by administrative regions.
- a township-level administrative region could be considered as a region.
- the projection of one of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered as a region. Since GEO satellites are stationary relative to the Earth, the projection of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered fixed relative to the Earth.
- the Earth's surface can be divided using a combination of different methods. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a part of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided according to its administrative region.
- a first level of region division can be performed using a 10-degree granularity latitude and longitude grid, a second level using a 6-degree granularity grid, and a third level using a 1-degree granularity grid.
- the number of regions at the first level is greater than the number at the second level
- the number of regions at the second level is greater than the number at the third level.
- each level of region can be individually numbered.
- FIG 1A exemplarily illustrates an architecture diagram of a communication system 1000 applicable to an embodiment of this application.
- the communication system includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200.
- the communication system 1000 may also include an Internet 300.
- the wireless access network 100 may include at least one wireless access network device (110a and 110b in Figure 1A) and at least one terminal device (120a-120j in Figure 1A).
- the terminal device is wirelessly connected to the wireless access network device, and the wireless access network device is wirelessly or wiredly connected to the core network.
- the core network device and the wireless access network device may be independent and different physical devices, or the functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the wireless access network device may be integrated on the same physical device, or a single physical device may integrate some of the functions of the core network device and some of the functions of the wireless access network device.
- Terminal devices and wireless access network devices may be interconnected via wired or wireless means.
- Figure 1A is just a schematic diagram.
- the communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in Figure 1A.
- RAN devices can be base stations, evolved NodeBs (eNodeBs), transmission reception points (TRPs), transmission points (TPs), next-generation NodeBs (gNBs) in 5G mobile communication systems, base stations in future mobile communication systems, or access nodes in WiFi systems; they can also be modules or units that perform some of the functions of a base station, for example, they can be central units (CUs), distributed units (DUs), or radio units (RUs).
- CUs central units
- DUs distributed units
- RUs radio units
- the CU Radio Control Unit
- the CU performs the functions of the Radio Resource Control Protocol (RRC) and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also perform the functions of the Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP).
- the DU Radio Access Unit
- the CU and DU can be set up separately or included in the same network element, such as in the baseband unit (BBU).
- the RU Radio Receiver Unit
- RRU remote radio unit
- AAU active antenna unit
- RRH remote radio head
- CU, DU, or RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meanings.
- CU can also be called open CU (open-CU, O-CU)
- DU can also be called open DU (open-DU, O-DU)
- RU can also be called open RU (open-RU, O-RU).
- any unit among CU can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software and hardware modules.
- CU-CP can also be called open CU-CP (open-CU-CP, O-CU-CP), and CU-UP can also be called open CU-UP (open-CU-UP, O-CU-UP).
- Figure 1B illustrates an exemplary O-RAN system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
- the O-RAN system in the embodiments provided by this application may include components other than those shown in Figure 1B.
- the access network device (RAN, for example, an eNB, gNB, or next-generation access network device) communicates with the core network (CN) via a backhaul link and with the user equipment (UE) via an air interface.
- the baseband unit (BBU) in the access network device communicates with the core network via a backhaul link
- the radio unit (RU) in the access network device communicates with at least one UE via an air interface.
- the BBU communicates with at least one RU via a fronthaul link; the BBU and RU may or may not be co-located.
- the BBU includes at least one control unit (CU) and at least one distributed unit (DU), which can communicate via at least one midhaul link.
- the third communication device can configure information of the auxiliary communication device to the terminal device (e.g., UE), and can also send signaling to the terminal device for activating or deactivating one or more communication devices. The sending of these signaling messages can be sent to the terminal device by the CU and/or DU in the third communication device.
- FIG. 1C exemplarily illustrates a schematic diagram of an O-RAN system architecture provided in an embodiment of this application.
- O-RAN may include O-CU-CP, O-CU-UP, O-DU, and O-RU.
- the system architecture may also include an open cloud (O-cloud), a service management and orchestration framework, an open eNB (O-eNB), a near-real-time (RT) RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC), and a non-real-time RIC.
- the non-RT RIC can monitor, configure, manage, and control radio resources of at least one of multiple O-CU-CP, O-CU-UP, DU, or O-eNB.
- the interfaces defined by 3GPP include, for example, E1, F1 (e.g., F1-c, F1-u), NG (e.g., NG-c, NG-u), Xn (e.g., Xn-c, Xn-u), and X2 (e.g., X2-c, X2-u).
- the O-RAN communication system also includes interfaces such as O1, O2, E2, A1, and Open Fronthaul (FH) interfaces (e.g., Open-FH Control (M)-plane, and Open-FH Control, User, and Synchronization (CUS)-plane).
- FH Open Fronthaul
- M Open-FH Control
- CCS Synchronization
- Wireless access network equipment can be a macro base station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110a), a micro base station or an indoor station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110b), or a relay node or donor node, etc.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology or equipment form used in the wireless access network equipment.
- a base station is used as an example of wireless access network equipment in the following description.
- Terminal devices can also be referred to as user equipment (UE), mobile stations, mobile terminal devices, etc.
- Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grids, smart furniture, smart offices, smart wearables, smart transportation, smart cities, etc.
- Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, sensors, etc. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technologies or device forms used in the terminal devices.
- the aforementioned terminal devices can establish connections with the operator's network through interfaces provided by the operator's network (such as N1), and use data and/or voice services provided by the operator's network.
- the terminal devices can also access the Domain Name System (DNS) through the operator's network, and use operator services deployed on the DNS, and/or services provided by third parties.
- DNS Domain Name System
- third parties can be service providers outside of the operator's network and the terminal devices, and can provide other data and/or voice services to the terminal devices. The specific form of these third parties can be determined based on the actual application scenario and is not limited here.
- Terminal devices can also be referred to as user equipment (UE), mobile stations, mobile terminal devices, etc.
- Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grids, smart furniture, smart offices, smart wearables, smart transportation, smart cities, etc.
- Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, roadside units (RSUs), etc.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technologies or device forms used in the terminal devices.
- Base stations and terminal equipment can be fixed or mobile. They can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; on water; or in the air on aircraft, balloons, and satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of the base stations and terminal equipment.
- the helicopter or drone 120i in Figure 1A can be configured as a mobile base station.
- terminal device 120i For terminal devices 120j that access the wireless access network 100 through 120i, terminal device 120i is a base station; however, for base station 110a, 120i is a terminal device, meaning that 110a and 120i communicate via a wireless air interface protocol.
- 110a and 120i can also communicate via a base station-to-base station interface protocol.
- base station In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, both base stations and terminal devices can be collectively referred to as communication devices.
- 110a and 110b in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with base station functions
- 120a-120j in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with terminal device functions.
- Communication between base stations and terminal devices, between base stations, and between terminal devices can be conducted using licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, or both simultaneously. Communication can be conducted using spectrum below 6 GHz, spectrum above 6 GHz, or both simultaneously.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
- the functions of the base station can be executed by modules (such as chips) within the base station, or by a control subsystem that includes base station functions.
- This control subsystem, including base station functions can be a control center in the aforementioned application scenarios such as smart grids, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart cities.
- the functions of the terminal device can be executed by modules (such as chips or modems) within the terminal device, or by a device that includes terminal device functions.
- the base station sends downlink signals or downlink information to the terminal device, with the downlink information carried on the downlink channel; the terminal device sends uplink signals or uplink information to the base station, with the uplink information carried on the uplink channel.
- the terminal device needs to establish a radio connection with a cell controlled by the base station.
- the cell with which the terminal device has established a radio connection is called the serving cell of the terminal device.
- the terminal device communicates with this serving cell, it is also subject to interference from signals from neighboring cells.
- the core network involved in this application embodiment may include network devices that process and forward user signaling and data.
- it includes core network devices such as access and mobility management functions (AMF), session management functions (SMF), user plane gateways, and location management devices.
- the user plane gateway can be a server with functions such as mobility management, routing, and forwarding of user plane data, generally located on the network side, such as a serving gateway (SGW), packet data network gateway (PGW), or user plane function (UPF).
- SGW serving gateway
- PGW packet data network gateway
- UPF user plane function
- AMF and SMF are equivalent to the mobility management entity (MME) in a long-term evolution (LTE) system.
- AMF is mainly responsible for admission aspects
- SMF is mainly responsible for session management.
- the core network may also include other network elements, which are not listed here.
- FIG 1A is only a schematic diagram.
- the wireless communication system may also include other devices, such as core network devices, wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in Figure 1A.
- Figures 1D and 1E exemplarily illustrate network architecture diagrams of several communication systems applicable to embodiments of this application.
- the communication system may include satellites, network devices, and terminal devices, etc.
- the communication system may also include gateways and core network devices.
- Figures 1D and 1E exemplarily illustrate a converged network architecture of NTN and terrestrial networks. A description is provided below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
- the satellite can be a highly elliptical orbit (HEO) satellite, a GEO satellite, a medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite, or a low earth orbit (LEO) satellite.
- HEO highly elliptical orbit
- GEO GEO
- MEO medium earth orbit
- LEO low earth orbit
- This application does not limit the satellite's operating mode; for example, the satellite can operate in transparent mode or regenerative mode.
- Figure 1D illustrates the satellite operating in transparent mode
- Figure 1E illustrates the satellite operating in regenerative mode.
- a gateway When a satellite operates in transparent mode, it provides transparent relay forwarding functionality.
- a gateway possesses the functions of a network device (such as a base station) or some of the functions of a network device (such as a base station); in this case, the gateway can be considered a network device (such as a base station). Alternatively, the network device (such as a base station) can be deployed separately from the gateway.
- the feeder link latency includes both the latency from the satellite to the gateway and the latency from the gateway to the gNB.
- the transparent mode discussed later assumes that the gateway and gNB are located together or close to each other. For cases where the gateway and gNB are far apart, the feeder link latency is simply the sum of the latency from the satellite to the gateway and the latency from the gateway to the gNB.
- a satellite When a satellite is operating in regenerative mode, it has data processing capabilities and functions as a network device (such as a base station) or partially functions as a network device (such as a base station).
- the satellite can be regarded as a network device (such as a base station).
- Satellites can communicate wirelessly with terminals via broadcast communication signals and navigation signals.
- each satellite can provide communication, navigation, and positioning services to terminal devices through multiple beams.
- each satellite uses multiple beams to cover the service area, and the relationship between different beams can be one or more of time-division, frequency-division, and space-division.
- a gateway also known as a ground station, earth station, or gateway
- a gateway is a network device used to connect satellites and ground-based devices (such as ground base stations).
- One or more satellites can connect to one or more ground-based network devices (such as ground base stations) through one or more gateways; this is not a limitation.
- the link between a satellite and a terminal is called a service link, and the link between a satellite and a gateway is called a feeder link.
- Network devices can be deployed separately from gateways; therefore, the latency of the feeder link can include both the latency from the satellite to the gateway and the latency from the gateway to the network device.
- the network devices in this application embodiment may include network devices deployed on satellites (such as satellite base stations), network devices deployed on gateways, or network devices deployed on the ground (such as ground base stations).
- the network devices may be radio access network (RAN) nodes, RAN nodes in O-RAN systems, etc., as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, and 1C. Related details are as described above and will not be repeated here.
- RAN radio access network
- a core network (CN) device is a ground-based device that can communicate with NTN devices within an NTN system.
- a CN can be the CN shown in Figures 1A, 1B, and 1C; relevant details are described above and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal can be the terminal involved in Figures 1A, 1B and 1C.
- Figures 1A, 1B and 1C For relevant details, please refer to the above description and we will not repeat them here.
- the embodiments of this application can also be applied to other communication system architectures, such as air-to-ground (ATG) communication systems, which include at least one network device and at least one high-altitude terminal.
- High-altitude terminals include, for example, high-altitude aircraft and onboard terminals.
- the satellites in Figures 1D and 1E can also be replaced with other relay devices, such as high-altitude platform stations (HAPS) or other NTN devices.
- HAPS high-altitude platform stations
- the communication system shown in Figure 1D or 1E is merely an example and does not limit the communication systems to which the methods provided in the embodiments of this application are applicable.
- the embodiments of this application can also be applied to air-to-ground (ATG) communication systems.
- ATG air-to-ground
- the communication system includes at least one network device and at least one high-altitude terminal device.
- the high-altitude terminal device includes, for example, high-altitude aircraft and onboard terminal devices.
- Figure 1G exemplarily illustrates another possible communication system architecture applicable to embodiments of this application.
- the communication system includes a first communication device, a second communication device, a third communication device, and a terminal device.
- This application embodiment uses the third communication device as the primary communication device and the first and second communication devices as secondary communication devices.
- the third communication device is used as the primary satellite device, the first communication device as secondary satellite device #1, and the second communication device as secondary satellite device #2.
- the terminal device can establish an RRC connection with the primary satellite device but does not establish an RRC connection with the secondary satellite device.
- the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #1 can communicate with the terminal device, for example, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #1 send data to the terminal device on the same resources.
- the terminal device can determine whether it needs to switch from the secondary satellite device #1 to the secondary satellite device #2 based on first information.
- the secondary satellite device #1 switches to the secondary satellite device #2.
- the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #2 can communicate with the terminal device (the terminal device stops communicating with the secondary satellite device #1, for example, stops maintaining downlink timing synchronization with the secondary satellite device #1), for example, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #2 send data to the terminal device on the same resources.
- the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device have the capability to transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources) (for understanding, this capability can be referred to as the first capability).
- the term "same resources” in this embodiment can be replaced with "same time-domain resources,” “same frequency-domain resources,” or “same frequency-domain resources and the same time-domain resources.” Descriptions of "same resources" in other locations are provided here and will not be repeated.
- the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device can use this first capability, that is, to send data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), or in other words, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device jointly transmit data to the terminal device.
- the same resources e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources
- the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device may not use this first capability, for example, the two data transmissions sent by the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device to the terminal device may occupy different resources (e.g., the time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources occupied by the two data transmissions may be different); or the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device may not need to jointly transmit data to the terminal device; or the terminal device may communicate with a single satellite device (the primary satellite device or the secondary satellite device).
- the two data transmissions sent by the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device to the terminal device may occupy different resources (e.g., the time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources occupied by the two data transmissions may be different); or the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device may not need to jointly transmit data to the terminal device; or the terminal device may communicate with a single satellite device (the primary satellite device or the secondary satellite device).
- the terminal device can be the terminal or its internal chip system involved in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, or 1F.
- the first communication device in this embodiment can be a satellite or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1D, 1E, or 1F, or it can be a network device (e.g., access network equipment, ground station, etc.) or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, or 1F.
- the second communication device in this embodiment can be a satellite or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1D, 1E, or 1F, or it can be a network device (e.g., access network equipment, ground station, etc.) or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, or 1F.
- the third communication device in this application embodiment can be a satellite or a chip system inside a satellite as shown in Figure 1D, Figure 1E or Figure 1F, or it can be a network device (e.g., access network device, ground station, etc.) or a chip system inside a network device as shown in Figure 1A, Figure 1B, Figure 1C, Figure 1D, Figure 1E or Figure 1F.
- the communication device in this application embodiment can also be replaced by a cell or a transmission reception point (TRP).
- the third communication device can also be replaced by a cell, a third cell, or a primary cell.
- the first communication device can be replaced by a cell, a first cell, or a secondary cell.
- the second communication device can be replaced by a cell, a second cell, or a secondary cell.
- the secondary communication device involved in this application embodiment can also be replaced by a secondary cell.
- the third communication device is the third cell
- the second communication device is the second cell
- the first communication device is the first cell
- any two of the third cell, the second cell, and the first cell can belong to cells within the coverage area of different network devices, or belong to cells within the coverage area of the same network device.
- this application embodiment does not impose any restrictions on this.
- the third communication device is the third cell and the second communication device is the second cell (or, the third communication device is the third cell and the first communication device is the first cell), and the second communication device and the third communication device send data to the terminal device on the same resources (the same time domain resources and/or frequency domain resources), this scheme can also be called multi-cell joint transmission.
- any two of the third communication device, the second communication device, and the first communication device can be of the same type or different types.
- the third communication device is a third satellite device (e.g., a primary satellite device), the second communication device is a second satellite device (e.g., auxiliary satellite device #2), and the first communication device is a first satellite device (e.g., auxiliary satellite device #1).
- the satellite devices e.g., the first, second, and third satellite devices in this embodiment can be satellites or internal chip systems within satellites as shown in Figures 1D, 1E, or 1F.
- this scheme can also be called multi-satellite joint transmission.
- the first threshold can be the cyclic prefix (CP) duration, or other set values, or a value calculated based on the CP duration (e.g., the CP duration plus or minus a value, or, for example, the CP duration multiplied by a value).
- CP cyclic prefix
- this transmission method can also be called multi-satellite joint quasi-synchronous (or asynchronous) transmission.
- this transmission method can also be called multi-satellite joint asynchronous transmission.
- the operating mode of the satellite device can be a transparent transmission mode or a regeneration mode.
- the operating modes of any two of the third, second, and first communication devices can be the same or different.
- the third communication device is a network device (such as access network equipment, ground station, etc.), and the second and first communication devices are satellite devices.
- the third communication device is a satellite device, and the second and first communication devices are network devices (such as access network equipment, ground station, etc.).
- the third, second, and third communication devices are three network devices (such as access network equipment, ground station, etc.).
- Figure 2 exemplarily illustrates a possible flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 2 uses the interaction of a terminal device, a first communication device, a second communication device, and a third communication device as an example. Examples of the terminal device, the first communication device, the second communication device, and the third communication device can be found in the description of Figure 1G above, and will not be repeated here.
- the first communication device is a first satellite device (or first auxiliary communication device, first auxiliary satellite device, auxiliary satellite device #1), the second communication device is a second satellite device (or second auxiliary communication device, second auxiliary satellite device, auxiliary satellite device #2), and the third communication device is a third satellite device (or a primary satellite device).
- Figure 2 provides an example of a terminal device switching auxiliary communication devices.
- the terminal device can communicate with one or more auxiliary communication devices, and the terminal device can switch from one or more auxiliary communication devices to one or more auxiliary communication devices.
- This application embodiment uses the example of the terminal device switching from one auxiliary communication device (first communication device) to another auxiliary communication device (second communication device) as an example.
- the switching process for other auxiliary communication devices can also refer to the process of the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal device can establish an RRC connection with the primary communication device, but does not need to establish an RRC connection with the auxiliary communication device.
- the terminal device can communicate with the primary communication device (e.g., send uplink or downlink data), and the terminal device can also communicate with the auxiliary communication devices (e.g., send uplink or downlink data).
- Step 201 The terminal device obtains the first information and determines to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device based on the first information.
- the first information may include/be replaced with: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
- the first information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device), and information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the second communication device).
- the first region includes/is the region where the terminal device is located.
- implementation methods A1 and A2 The following describes two implementation methods for how a terminal device determines whether to switch communication devices based on first information, using implementation methods A1 and A2 as examples.
- the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the second communication device based on the first information (e.g., information about the second communication device).
- the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the second communication device based on both the first information (e.g., information about the second communication device) and the second information (e.g., information about the first communication device).
- the terminal device can determine whether it needs to switch to the second communication device based on the first information (e.g., information of the second communication device).
- the terminal device may not need to consider information from other communication devices (e.g., second information). For example, the terminal device can determine whether the area served by the second communication device includes the first area based on the first information. For example, if the first information indicates that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first area, the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the second communication device (or switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device). Alternatively, if the first information indicates that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, the terminal device determines that it does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device. Since the terminal device can determine whether to switch communication devices based on the first information, this scheme does not require other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to issue switching instructions, thereby saving signaling overhead.
- this scheme does not require other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to issue switching instructions, thereby saving signaling overhead.
- a terminal device determines whether the area served by the second communication device includes the first area based on the first information. For example, if the first information meets the first condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. Alternatively, the terminal device can determine that, if the first information meets the first condition, the area served by the second communication device includes the first area.
- the first condition includes, for example, one or more of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range (Implementation A1.1); the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first orbital angle range (Implementation A1.2); the time indicated by the first time information (e.g., the current time) belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area (Implementation A1.3); the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler range (Implementation A1.4); the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range (Implementation A1.5); the TA corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first TA range (Implementation A1.6); the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first change rate range (Implementation A1.7); the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the second change rate range (Implementation A1.8).
- the first condition includes: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range.
- the elevation angle in this embodiment can be formed by two lines.
- the elevation angle can be replaced by a "direction angle".
- the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be formed by the angle between the line passing through the second communication device and the projection of the line on a plane.
- the elevation angle can include: the angle between the line originating from the terminal device (or ground reference point) and the projection of the line on the horizontal plane.
- the elevation angle in this embodiment can range from [0°, 90°].
- the elevation angle includes the angle between the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) and the horizon where the terminal device is located.
- the elevation angle can also be used to describe the position of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) above the terminal device (or ground reference point) at a certain moment; for example, an elevation angle of 90° can indicate that the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) is directly above the terminal device (or ground reference point).
- the elevation angle is related to the position of the terminal device (or ground reference point)
- the elevation angle of the same communication device e.g., a satellite device
- the elevation angle changes continuously as the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) moves in its orbit.
- the terminal device can determine the elevation angle based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device. For instance, the terminal device can determine the position of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information, and then calculate the elevation angle of the second communication device based on the position of the second communication device and the position of the terminal device.
- its ephemeris information may include, for example, the satellite device's velocity information, its trajectory information, its position information, and the time information corresponding to its position.
- the terminal device acquires the position of a ground reference point.
- the ground reference point can be a point within an area, such as a point relatively close to (or located in) the central area of an area.
- the ground reference point can be reused from ground reference points used in cell reselection or conditional handover (CHO) measurement procedures.
- the position of this ground reference point can be pre-configured on the terminal device side, or it can be sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device), or the position can be determined by the terminal device according to preset rules.
- the terminal device determines the position of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information, and then calculates the elevation angle based on the position of the second communication device and the position of the ground reference point.
- This elevation angle is the elevation angle of the second communication device.
- two terminal devices within an area calculate the elevation angle of the second communication device, they can both calculate the corresponding elevation angle based on the position of the second communication device and the position of the ground reference point. In this case, the elevation angles calculated by two different terminal devices within the area may be equal.
- Figure 3 illustrates a possible elevation angle provided by an embodiment of this application.
- the terminal device is located at the origin of the coordinate system.
- the three coordinate axes of this coordinate system are represented as the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis, and any two of the three axes are perpendicular to each other.
- Figure 3 illustrates an example with the first communication device as auxiliary satellite device #1, the second communication device as auxiliary satellite device #2, and the third communication device as the primary satellite device.
- the communication system may also include other satellite devices, which are not shown in Figure 3.
- the orbits of any two of the first, second, and third communication devices can be the same orbit or different orbits; Figure 3 shows one possible example.
- Line #13 is the line originating from the terminal device and projected towards the second communication device.
- line #14 represents the projection of line #13 onto the horizontal plane.
- ⁇ 2 is the angle between line #13 and its projection onto the horizontal plane (line #14).
- ⁇ 2 is the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device.
- line #11 is the line originating from the terminal device and projected towards the first communication device.
- line #12 represents the projection of line #11 onto the horizontal plane.
- ⁇ 1 is the angle between line #11 and its projection onto the horizontal plane (line #12).
- ⁇ 1 is the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device.
- the elevation angle shown in Figure 3 is illustrated using the location of the terminal device as the origin of the coordinate system. In practical applications, the origin of the coordinate system for calculating the elevation angle can be replaced by the location of a ground reference point.
- the elevation angle shown in Figure 3 is one possible example; in practical applications, other angles can also be used to represent the elevation angle.
- the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device is ⁇ 1
- the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of ⁇ 2 .
- the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of ⁇ 1
- the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be ⁇ 2 .
- the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of ⁇ 1
- the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of ⁇ 2 .
- the terminal device can obtain a first elevation angle range, and then determine whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area based on whether the elevation angle of the second communication device is within the first elevation angle range. For example, when the elevation angle of the second communication device is within the first elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services includes the first area. As another example, when the elevation angle of the second communication device is not within the first elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
- the terminal device can acquire information indicating the first elevation angle range and determine the first elevation angle range based on the information indicating the first elevation angle range.
- the information indicating the first elevation angle range can be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range can be either elevation angle values or index values related to the first elevation angle range.
- the following examples illustrate the specific forms of information used to indicate the first elevation angle range.
- the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range includes two elevation angle values. These two elevation angle values are used to indicate the two boundaries of the first elevation angle range. For example, if the elevation angle range is [50°, 90°], the information indicating the elevation angle range includes elevation angle values of 50° and 90°.
- “°” is used as a symbol to represent angle.
- the symbol "[]" representing an angle range can be replaced with "()".
- [50°, 90°] can be replaced with (50°, 90°), where 50° and 90° can be considered the boundaries of the elevation angle range.
- [50°, 90°] indicates that the elevation angle range includes 50° and 90°.
- (50°, 90°) indicates that the elevation angle range does not include 50° and 90°.
- the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range may include an elevation angle value.
- This elevation angle value is the minimum elevation angle value within the first elevation angle range.
- the maximum elevation angle value within the first elevation angle range is a predefined value, such as 90°. For example, if the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range is an elevation angle value of 50°, then the first elevation angle range is [50°, 90°].
- This maximum elevation angle value may be pre-configured on the terminal device side or agreed upon by a protocol, or sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range may include an elevation angle value.
- This elevation angle value may indicate the two boundaries of the first elevation angle range, for example, the elevation angle value is 60°.
- the range before and after this elevation angle value within 30° constitutes the first elevation angle range, where 30° is an example and can be replaced with other preset angle values.
- This preset angle value may be pre-configured on the terminal device side or agreed upon by a protocol, or sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range may include an index value. This index value is associated with the first elevation angle range, and the terminal device can use the index value to find the elevation angle range associated with the index value, thereby determining the first elevation angle range.
- the terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched over). These auxiliary communication devices can be designated as auxiliary communication devices to be switched over, and the second communication device belongs to this group of auxiliary communication devices. In another possible implementation, these auxiliary communication devices can have priorities; for example, the first communication device has a higher priority than the second communication device, and the second communication device is the highest priority communication device to be switched over after the first communication device. The second communication device can be the highest priority among these candidate auxiliary communication devices.
- the terminal device when the terminal device needs to switch auxiliary communication devices (e.g., the terminal device determines that the first communication device is currently or will soon be unable to provide service to the terminal device), it can determine whether the second communication device can provide service to the terminal device based on priority (e.g., determining whether the area where the second communication device provides service includes the first area based on first information).
- the priority information of these auxiliary communication devices e.g., priority information can be indicated in the form of a list of auxiliary communication devices
- the terminal device can identify multiple auxiliary communication devices that can provide services to the terminal device, and then select the communication device with the best or better quality as the target auxiliary communication device to be switched based on the signal quality of these auxiliary communication devices.
- the following table exemplifies an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device.
- the information of a communication device may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and information indicating the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device.
- Table 1 illustrates an example where the information indicating the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device includes two boundary values of the elevation angle range.
- the elevation angle ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the first elevation angle range is [elevation angle #3, elevation angle #4].
- Table 1 Examples of information on candidate auxiliary communication devices
- Table 2 illustrates information indicating the elevation angle range corresponding to this communication device, including the minimum elevation angle within that range. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the first elevation angle range is [elevation angle #3, maximum elevation angle]. The maximum elevation angle can be a preset value, for example, 90 degrees. Other content in Table 2 is similar to that in Table 1 and will not be repeated.
- each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched) acquired by the terminal device may be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- Other communication devices e.g., a third communication device
- the priority of each communication device can be the sorting relationship of each auxiliary communication device to be switched in the list.
- the priority of communication device #0 is higher than the priority of communication device #1
- the priority of communication device #1 is higher than the priority of communication device #2.
- the priority of each communication device may be determined based on the order in which each communication device provides services to the first area. For example, based on the movement pattern of each communication device, the communication device that provides services to the first area earliest (or the communication device whose elevation angle is earliest within the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device) may have the highest priority; the communication device that provides services to the first area second (or the communication device whose elevation angle is second within the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device) may have the second highest priority, and so on.
- the terminal device can also acquire other information about the communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched to), such as the communication device's identifier, downlink synchronization reference signal sequence information, downlink synchronization signal frequency, measurement timing configuration, polarization information, etc.
- This information may be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device). This information can assist the terminal device in switching to the auxiliary communication device. For example, after determining that it needs to switch to the second communication device, the terminal device can more quickly search for the synchronization signal of the second communication device based on this information, thereby achieving timing synchronization (or downlink timing synchronization) with the second communication device more quickly.
- the first condition includes: the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the first orbital angle.
- the angles used to describe the angle range of the orbital interval may include: the angle between a line passing through the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) and the center of the orbit of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device), and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) and the center of the orbit of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device).
- the angles in the first orbital angle range include: the angle between a line connecting a point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device, and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device.
- the angle used to indicate the orbital interval can range from [0°, 360°].
- the reference point for the orbits of different communication devices can be different.
- the reference point in this application embodiment may include the intersection of the ascending orbit and the orbital plane of the communication device (e.g., satellite device), or the intersection of the ascending orbit and the ecliptic plane.
- the ecliptic plane can refer to the orbital plane of the Earth's revolution around the Sun.
- An ascending orbit can refer to a satellite's motion from the Earth's South Pole to the Earth's North Pole; conversely, a descending orbit can be referred to as a downward orbit.
- the terminal device can determine the orbital angle based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device. For instance, the terminal device can determine the position of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information, and then calculate the orbital angle of the second communication device based on its position and the position of its orbital center.
- Figure 4 illustrates a possible orbital angle provided by an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 4 uses a first communication device as auxiliary satellite device #1 and a second communication device as auxiliary satellite device #2 as an example.
- the communication system may also include other satellite devices, not shown in Figure 3.
- the orbits of any two of the first and second communication devices can be the same orbit or different orbits; Figure 3 shows one possible example.
- Figure 4 shows the orbital planes of the second communication device and the first communication device.
- Figure 4 uses the orbital centers of the two orbits as an example, but in practical applications, the orbital centers of different communication devices (e.g., satellite devices) may be different.
- Figure 4 exemplarily shows reference point #22 on the orbit of the first communication device and reference point #21 on the orbit of the second communication device.
- the angle between the line connecting reference point #21 and the track center of the second communication device, and the line connecting the two track centers of the second communication device is r2 .
- r2 can be, for example, the track angle corresponding to the second communication device.
- the angle between the line connecting reference point #22 and the track center of the first communication device, and the line connecting the two track centers of the first communication device is r1 .
- r1 can be, for example, the track angle corresponding to the first communication device.
- the terminal device can acquire a first orbital angle range, and then determine whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area based on whether the orbital angle of the second communication device is within the first orbital angle range. For example, when the orbital angle of the second communication device is within the first orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services includes the first area. As another example, when the orbital angle of the second communication device is not within the first orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
- the terminal device can acquire information indicating a first track angle range and determine the first track angle range based on the information indicating the first track angle range.
- the information indicating the first track angle range can be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- the information used to indicate the first track angle range can be track angle values or index values related to the first track angle range.
- the following examples illustrate the specific forms of information used to indicate the first track angle range.
- Example 1 The information used to indicate the first track angle range includes two track angle values. These two track angle values are used to indicate the two boundaries of the first track angle range. For example, if the track angle range is [50°, 130°], the information indicating the track angle range includes track angle values of 50° and 130°.
- the information used to indicate the first track angle range may include a track angle value.
- the track angle value could be the minimum or maximum value within the first track angle range, with another boundary value defined by the protocol or pre-configured.
- the track angle value could indicate the two boundaries of the first track angle range.
- the track angle value could be 90°.
- the first track angle range is defined by a 40° range before and after the track angle value (i.e., [50°, 130°]), where 40° is an example and can be replaced by other preset angle values. These preset angle values can be pre-configured on the terminal device side, agreed upon by the protocol, or sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- the information used to indicate the first track angle range may include an index value. This index value is associated with the first track angle range, and the terminal device can use the index value to find the track angle range associated with the index value, thereby determining the first track angle range.
- the terminal device can acquire information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched over), which can serve as auxiliary communication devices to be switched over, and the second communication device belongs to these multiple auxiliary communication devices. Based on the information from these communication devices, the terminal device determines whether the communication device provides service to the first area.
- the following table 3 illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or auxiliary communication device, or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device.
- the information of a communication device may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and information indicating the orbital angle range corresponding to the communication device.
- Table 3 illustrates an example where the information indicating the orbital angle range corresponding to the communication device includes two boundary values of the orbital angle range.
- the orbital angle ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the first orbital angle range is [orbital angle #3, orbital angle #4].
- the terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information for each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 3 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the first condition includes: the time indicated by the time information in the first information (e.g., the current time) belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area.
- the terminal device can obtain the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area. If the terminal device determines that the time indicated by the time information in the first information (e.g., the current time) belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area, then the terminal device can determine that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. If the terminal device determines that the time indicated by the time information in the first information (e.g., the current time) does not belong to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area, then the terminal device can determine that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the first information e.g., the current time
- Information regarding the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area may be pre-configured on the terminal device side, defined by a protocol, or sent by other communication devices (such as a third communication device).
- the terminal device can acquire information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched over), which can serve as auxiliary communication devices to be switched over, and the second communication device belongs to these multiple auxiliary communication devices. Based on the information from these communication devices, the terminal device determines whether the communication device provides service to the first area.
- Table 4 illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) obtained by a terminal device.
- the information of a communication device may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and the time period during which the communication device provides service to the first area.
- the time periods during which different communication devices provide service to the first area may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area is [t2, t3].
- t1 is equal to t2
- t3 is equal to t4.
- the terminal device can use communication device #0 as its auxiliary communication device at time t0, switch from communication device #0 to communication device #1 at time t1 (or around time t1) (using communication device #1 as its auxiliary communication device, and communication device #0 no longer serving as an auxiliary communication device for the terminal device), and switch from communication device #1 to communication device #2 at time t3 (or around time t3) (using communication device #2 as its auxiliary communication device, and communication device #1 no longer serving as an auxiliary communication device for the terminal device).
- the terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (also called auxiliary communication devices, candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information of each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
- Table 4 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device.
- the terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the first condition includes: the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler range.
- Figure 5 illustrates a schematic diagram of Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the signal of a communication device.
- the horizontal axis represents longitude
- the vertical axis represents latitude
- the dashed lines represent Doppler contour maps. That is, the Doppler values of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on the same dashed line are equal, while the Doppler values of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on different dashed lines are unequal.
- the solid lines represent Doppler rate of change contour maps. That is, the Doppler rate of change of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on the same dashed line is equal, while the Doppler rate of change of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on different dashed lines is unequal.
- the distance between the communication device and the terminal device affects the Doppler value of the signal received by the terminal device from the communication device.
- the Doppler values of the signals received from the same communication device at wave positions #1 and #2 are different.
- the Doppler value of the signal received at wave position #1 also shifts. That is, as the communication device moves, the Doppler value of the signal received from the communication device in the same area also changes.
- a communication device can correspond to a Doppler range.
- a second communication device can correspond to a first Doppler range.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the terminal device receives a signal from the second communication device and obtains the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device based on that signal.
- the terminal device obtains the position and/or velocity information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the position and/or velocity information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the position of the terminal device, and then determines the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
- the terminal device calculates the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device based on the motion relationship between the second communication device and the terminal device (e.g., determined based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device). For example, the terminal device receives a reference signal from the second communication device (e.g., demodulation reference signal (DMRS), phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), synchronization signal and PBCH block (SSB), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.), and obtains the Doppler corresponding to the signal of the second communication device by detecting the reference signal.
- DMRS demodulation reference signal
- PTRS phase tracking reference signal
- SSB synchronization signal and PBCH block
- CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
- the terminal device can obtain the first Doppler range by referring to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, which is similar and will not be repeated here.
- Table 5 below illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device.
- the information of a communication device may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and the Doppler range corresponding to the communication device.
- the Doppler ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the Doppler range corresponding to the second communication device (i.e., the first Doppler range) is [Doppler3, Doppler4].
- the terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information for each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 5 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the first condition includes: the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range.
- the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device determined by the terminal device can be the rate of change of Doppler values over a period of time.
- the term "Doppler rate" can be replaced with "rate of change of Doppler values.”
- the terminal device may acquire two Doppler values sequentially and then calculate the rate of change of Doppler values over that period. For instance, the terminal device may divide the difference between the two Doppler values by the duration of that period to obtain the Doppler rate.
- the terminal device may acquire the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the position of the terminal device, and then determine the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
- the second communication device e.g., determining the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information
- a communication device can correspond to a Doppler rate range.
- a second communication device can correspond to a first Doppler rate range.
- the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device includes the first area.
- the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the method by which the terminal device obtains the first Doppler rate range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
- Table 6 illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device.
- the information of a communication device may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and the Doppler rate range corresponding to the communication device.
- the Doppler rate ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the Doppler rate range corresponding to the second communication device (i.e., the first Doppler rate range) is [Doppler_rate3, Doppler_rate4].
- the terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information for each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 6 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
- the first condition includes: the TA corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the first TA.
- the terminal device can obtain the TA of the second communication device from signaling received from other communication devices.
- the terminal device can receive a signal from the second communication device and obtain the TA corresponding to that signal.
- the terminal device can obtain the location of the second communication device (e.g., determine the location of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the location of the terminal device, and then determine the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on these two location information.
- the terminal device can calculate the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on the motion relationship between the second communication device and the terminal device (e.g., determined based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device).
- a communication device can correspond to a TA range.
- a second communication device can correspond to a first TA range.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the method by which the terminal device obtains the first TA range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
- the first condition includes: the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the first TA change rate.
- the rate of change of the transfer signal (TA) corresponding to the second communication device can be the rate of change of the TA over a period of time.
- the terminal device may acquire two TA values sequentially and then calculate the rate of change of the TA over that period.
- the terminal device may divide the difference between the two TA values by the duration of that period to obtain the rate of change of the TA.
- the terminal device may also acquire the position and/or speed information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the position and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the position of the terminal device, and then determine the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
- the position and/or speed information of the second communication device e.g., determining the position and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information
- a communication device can correspond to a TA change rate range.
- a second communication device can correspond to a first TA change rate range.
- the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device includes the first area.
- the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the method by which the terminal device obtains the first TA change rate range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
- the first condition includes: the rate of change of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the second TA change rate.
- the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device can be the rate of change of the TA over a period of time.
- the terminal device may acquire two TA rates of change sequentially and then calculate the rate of change of the TA over that period.
- the terminal device may divide the difference between the two TA rates of change by the duration of that period to obtain the rate of change of the TA.
- the terminal device may acquire the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the terminal device's position, and then determine the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
- the second communication device e.g., determining the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information
- a communication device can correspond to a range of TA change rates.
- a second communication device can correspond to a second TA change rate range.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the method by which the terminal device obtains the second TA rate of change range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
- Implementation methods A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A1.4, A1.5, A1.6, A1.7, and A1.8 can be used in combination.
- the first condition can also be multiple items. When all items in the first condition are satisfied, it is determined that the first information satisfies the first condition; otherwise, it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied.
- the first condition is that the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range, and the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first orbital angle range.
- the terminal device determines that the first information satisfies the first condition.
- the terminal device determines that the first information does not satisfy the first condition.
- Other examples are similar and will not be described in detail.
- the terminal device can determine whether it is necessary to switch to the second communication device based on the first information (information of the second communication device) and the second information (information of the first communication device).
- the terminal device can acquire second information.
- the second information may include/are for determining the area where the first communication device provides services.
- the second information may include/are for determining the area where the first communication device currently and/or will soon (e.g., after a first duration) provide services, or for determining whether the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or will soon (e.g., after a first duration) include the first area.
- the terminal device can determine whether the area where the first communication device provides services includes the first area based on whether the second information satisfies a first condition.
- the terminal device can determine the motion pattern of the second communication device based on ephemeris information, and then, based on the motion pattern and the second information, infer whether the area where the first communication device provides services after a first duration includes the first area.
- "about to” can refer to an upcoming moment, or to a time after a certain duration, such as a time after a first duration.
- the value of the first duration can be preset, defined by a protocol, or indicated by another communication device to the terminal device.
- the value of the first duration can be a positive number, for example, the first duration is 5 minutes.
- the second information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the first communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device), time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device), and information associated with the TA of the first communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the first communication device).
- information associated with the position of the first communication device e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device
- time information e.g., current time information
- information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device
- information associated with the TA of the first communication device e.g., at least
- the second information and the first information can be two separate pieces of information, or they can be the same piece of information (for example, the first information and the second information can be the current time).
- the types of the first information and the second information can be the same or different.
- the first information is the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device
- the second information is the elevation angle, orbital angle, or current time of the first communication device.
- the terminal device can determine, based on the second information, whether the area currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration) still includes the first region. If the second information indicates that the area currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration) does not include the first region, the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the secondary communication device. If the terminal device determines, based on the first information, that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first region, the terminal device can determine that the target secondary communication device to be switched to is the second communication device. The terminal device can then switch from the first communication device to the second communication device (or switch the secondary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device).
- the specific implementation of the terminal device determining that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first region can be found in one or more of the aforementioned embodiments A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A1.4, A1.5, A1.6, A1.7, and A1.8, and will not be repeated here.
- the terminal device can determine that there is no need to switch to the auxiliary communication device, that is, it can continue to communicate with the first communication device.
- the terminal device can determine that switching to the secondary communication device is not yet necessary.
- the terminal device determines whether the first communication device will still include the first region in the future (e.g., after the first duration). For example, if the first communication device will still include the first region in the future (e.g., after the first duration), the terminal device can determine that switching to the secondary communication device is not yet necessary. If the first communication device will not include the first region in the future (e.g., after the first duration), the terminal device can determine that switching to the secondary communication device is necessary.
- the terminal device can determine that the target secondary communication device to be switched to is the second communication device. The terminal device can then switch from the first communication device to the second communication device (or switch the secondary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device).
- the terminal device can search for the next available secondary communication device when the first communication device is currently unable to provide service, or when the first communication device is about to become unavailable, and then switch to the secondary communication device.
- This approach can extend the usage time of the secondary communication device as much as possible, thereby reducing the number of secondary communication device switches and avoiding overly frequent switches, thus saving resource consumption.
- the second information can be used to indicate the area currently being served by the first communication device.
- the second information may include/be at least one of the following: the elevation angle, orbital angle, Doppler, Doppler rate, TA, rate of change of TA, rate of change of the rate of change of TA, and the current time.
- the terminal device can obtain the second information based on the location information of both the terminal device and the first communication device.
- the terminal device can determine the second information based on signals received from the first communication device.
- the terminal device can determine the second information based on information received from other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
- the method by which the terminal device obtains the second information can refer to the aforementioned method of obtaining the first information.
- the second information can be used to indicate the area where the first communication device will provide service in the future (e.g., after the first duration).
- the second information may include/be for at least one of the following: the elevation angle, orbital angle, Doppler, Doppler rate, TA, rate of change of TA, rate of change of the rate of change of TA, and the current time of the first communication device in the future (e.g., after the first duration).
- the terminal device may infer the second information in the future (e.g., after the first duration) based on the ephemeris information (and/or motion trajectory) of the first communication device and the location information (and/or motion trajectory) of the terminal device.
- the terminal device predicts the future (e.g., after a first duration) elevation angle (or orbital angle, or Doppler, or Doppler rate, or TA, or TA rate of change, or rate of change of TA rate of change) of the first communication device.
- the elevation angle of the first communication device indicated by the second information can be understood as the future (e.g., after a first duration) elevation angle (or orbital angle, or Doppler, or Doppler rate, or TA, or TA rate of change, or rate of change of TA rate of change) of the first communication device.
- the terminal device can determine whether the area currently or soon (e.g., after a first duration) of service provided by the first communication device includes the first region, based on the second information.
- the terminal device can determine the area currently being provided by the first communication device based on the second information, or it can infer the area to be provided by the first communication device in the future (e.g., after a first duration) based on the second information and the ephemeris information of the first communication device.
- the terminal device can determine the area to be provided by the first communication device in the future (e.g., after a first duration) based on the second information.
- the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area. As another example, if the second information meets the second condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information includes the first area.
- the second condition may include one or more of the following:
- the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the second elevation angle
- the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the second orbital angle.
- the time indicated by the time information belongs to the time period during which the first communication device provides services to the first area;
- the Doppler range corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the second Doppler range
- the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the second Doppler rate.
- the TA corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the range of the second TA;
- the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the third TA change rate.
- the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the fourth TA rate of change.
- the second condition is that the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the second elevation angle range. If the elevation angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current elevation angle of the first communication device or the elevation angle of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the second elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. If the elevation angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current elevation angle of the first communication device or the elevation angle of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the second elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
- the second condition is that the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the range of the second orbital angle. If the orbital angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current orbital angle of the first communication device or the orbital angle of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the range of the second orbital angle, the terminal device determines that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. If the orbital angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current orbital angle of the first communication device or the orbital angle of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the range of the second orbital angle, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
- the second condition is that the time indicated by the second information (which could be the current time or a time after the first duration) falls within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area. If the time indicated by the second information (which could be the current time or a time after the first duration) does not fall within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area, then the terminal device determines that the second information does not satisfy the second condition. If the time indicated by the second information (which could be the current time or a time after the first duration) falls within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area, then the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
- the second condition is that the Doppler signal corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the second Doppler range. If the Doppler signal indicated by the second information (which could be the current Doppler signal of the first communication device or the Doppler signal of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the second Doppler range, the terminal device determines that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. If the Doppler signal indicated by the second information (which could be the current Doppler signal of the first communication device or the Doppler signal of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the second Doppler range, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
- the second condition can also include multiple conditions. If all conditions are met, the second information is determined to satisfy the first condition; otherwise, it is determined not to satisfy the second condition.
- the second condition could be that the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second elevation angle range, and the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second orbital angle range.
- the terminal device determines that the second information does not satisfy the second condition.
- the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
- Step 202 The second communication device sends a synchronization signal.
- the terminal device receives the synchronization signal.
- step 202 "the terminal device receives a synchronization signal" and "the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device” can be interchanged.
- Switching from the first communication device to the second communication device can include/be replaced by: the terminal device selecting the second communication device as the auxiliary communication device, and the first communication device no longer serving as the auxiliary communication device.
- switching from the first communication device to the second communication device can include/be replaced by: the terminal device establishing downlink timing synchronization with the second communication device, and the terminal device no longer maintaining the downlink timing synchronization of the first communication device (or not establishing downlink timing synchronization with the first communication device).
- switching from the first communication device to the second communication device can include/be replaced by: the terminal device detecting the synchronization signal of the second communication device, and the terminal device no longer detecting the synchronization signal of the first communication device.
- Step 202 can also be replaced by: the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device when the first information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
- step 202 can also be replaced by: the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device when the first information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, and the second information indicates that the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or after the first duration does not include the first area.
- the second communication device when the second communication device determines that the terminal device needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device, the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the area where the terminal device is located. In other words, the second communication device begins periodically sending the synchronization signal to the first area (the area where the terminal device is located) at a shorter duration (e.g., a second duration). Further, when the second communication device subsequently determines that the terminal device will no longer use the second communication device as the auxiliary communication device, the second communication device can stop periodically sending the synchronization signal to the first area (the area where the terminal device is located) at a shorter duration (e.g., the second duration).
- the second communication device can stop sending the synchronization signal to the first area altogether, or periodically send the synchronization signal to the first area at a longer duration (e.g., a third duration, the third duration being longer than the second duration). Because in this implementation, the second communication device does not continuously periodically send the synchronization signal to the first area at a shorter duration (e.g., the second duration), resource consumption can be saved, and interference in the communication system can be reduced.
- a longer duration e.g., a third duration, the third duration being longer than the second duration.
- Step 203 The third communication device sends the second data to the terminal device from the first resource.
- Step 204 The second communication device sends the first data to the terminal device from the first resource.
- the terminal device receives first data and second data on the first resource.
- a primary communication device e.g., a third communication device
- one or more secondary communication devices e.g., a second communication device
- the data transmitted to the terminal device by any two of the primary and secondary communication devices can be the same or different.
- This embodiment uses the example of a third communication device and a second communication device transmitting data to the terminal device on the same resources.
- the terminal device receives superimposed data of the first data and the second data.
- the first data comes from the second communication device, and the second data comes from the third communication device.
- the first resource is used by the second communication device to send the first data, and the first data occupies the first resource.
- the first resource is also used by the third communication device to send the second data, and the second data occupies the first resource.
- the first data and the second data can be the same data or different data. Alternatively, the first data and the second data can carry the same information or different information.
- the first resource may include time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources, with the first data and the second data having the same time-domain resources and the same frequency-domain resources.
- the first resource may include time-domain resources, where the first data and the second data have the same time-domain resources, and their frequency-domain resources may be the same or different.
- the first resource may include frequency-domain resources, where the first data and the second data have the same frequency-domain resources, and their time-domain resources may be the same or different.
- Step 205 The terminal device acquires the first data and the second data.
- step 205 the terminal device obtains the first data and the second data from the superimposed signal corresponding to the received first data and the second data.
- the terminal device can switch the auxiliary satellite device based on the first information (or the first information and the second information). During this process, no other communication device (such as a third communication device) needs to issue a switching command, so this scheme can save signaling overhead.
- step 201 another possible implementation includes the first information indicating that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
- the terminal device can continue to detect whether the area served by other communication devices includes the first area. For example, if the area served by the fourth communication device includes the first area, the terminal device can switch from the first communication device to the fourth communication device.
- the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the timing (or downlink timing) corresponding to the second communication device can be less than, equal to, or greater than the first threshold.
- the difference between the timing (or downlink timing) corresponding to the second data and the downlink timing corresponding to the first data can be less than, equal to, or greater than the first threshold.
- the timing can be replaced by downlink timing, downlink synchronization timing, time synchronization, or downlink time synchronization.
- Downlink timing is also known as downlink timing.
- Downlink timing is used to enable the terminal device to determine the frame boundaries, subframe boundaries, time slot boundaries, symbol boundaries, or receive window positions of frames transmitted by the communication device.
- the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device can also be replaced by/include: the downlink timing difference between the third and second communication devices, the difference in frame boundaries of downlink frames from the third and second communication devices, downlink timing difference, synchronization position difference, time difference, downlink time difference, and the time difference of the received signal, etc.
- the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third and second communication devices can also be replaced by/include: the downlink timing difference when the terminal receives data from the third and second communication devices respectively, the difference in frame boundaries of downlink frames from the third and second communication devices respectively, downlink timing difference, synchronization position difference, time difference, downlink time difference, and the time difference of the received signal, etc.
- the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device can also be replaced by/included as: the time difference of the frame boundary of the same frame number of the two downlink signals received by the terminal device from the third communication device and the second communication device respectively, the time difference of the time slot boundary of the same time slot number, or the time difference of the symbol boundary of the same symbol index number.
- the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device may be a variable, which may be related to the difference in data transmission delay between the third and second communication devices. This difference may or may not be equal to the difference in data transmission delay between the third and second communication devices.
- Figure 6 exemplarily illustrates a schematic diagram of the arrival of information transmitted by multiple communication devices to a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.
- the data sent by the third communication device to the terminal device includes S1 and S2.
- the data sent by the second communication device to the terminal device includes S3.
- the arrival time of the data sent by the third communication device to the terminal device is t0
- the arrival time of the data sent by the second communication device to the terminal device is ( t0 + t1 ).
- t1 is the time difference between the arrival times of the data sent by the third and second communication devices to the terminal device.
- t1 can also be understood as the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device.
- t1 may be less than or equal to a first threshold, or it may be greater than the first threshold.
- Figure 7 exemplarily illustrates a possible flowchart of a terminal device data acquisition method provided by an embodiment of this application. Referring to Figure 7, the process may include the following steps.
- the second data sent by the third communication device arrives at the terminal device through the channel corresponding to the third communication device, and the first data sent by the second communication device arrives at the terminal device through the channel corresponding to the second communication device.
- the first data and the second data occupy the same resources.
- the terminal device receives the superimposed signal corresponding to the first data and the second data.
- the terminal device decodes the second data (e.g., S1 and S2) from the received signal.
- the terminal device obtains the second data affected by the channel based on the second data and the influence of the channel on the signal. For example, the terminal device reconstructs the signal according to the decoding results of signals S1 and S2 to obtain S1 and S2 affected by the channel.
- the S1 and S2 affected by the channel are, for example, (S1*h1+S2*h2). Where h1 and h2 represent the influence of the channel on the signal.
- the terminal device removes the second data affected by the channel from the superimposed signal corresponding to the first data and the second data received, and then obtains the first data from the obtained data (e.g., S3).
- the terminal device uses the superimposed signal of the two received communication devices to subtract the recovered (S1*h1+S2*h2) to obtain the first data.
- This process can be understood as a successive interference cancellation (SIC) signal processing method.
- SIC successive interference cancellation
- the terminal device can also decode the first data in step (1) and then obtain the second data in step (3).
- the scheme is similar to the above and will not be described again.
- the above method can eliminate interference between signals transmitted from multiple communication devices to the terminal device. Furthermore, this interference cancellation method can better extract the data transmitted by each communication device from the received superimposed signals.
- Figure 8 exemplarily illustrates a possible flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
- Figure 8 uses the interaction of a terminal device, a first communication device, a second communication device, and a third communication device as an example.
- the terminal device, the first communication device, the second communication device, and the third communication device please refer to the relevant description in Figure 2 above, which will not be repeated here.
- Step 801 The terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device.
- the terminal device may first receive a synchronization signal (e.g., a synchronization signal) from the third communication device, then synchronize with the third communication device, and then establish an RRC connection with the third communication device.
- a synchronization signal e.g., a synchronization signal
- the terminal device can maintain synchronization with multiple communication devices, but it can establish an RRC connection with a third communication device without establishing RRC connections with other communication devices.
- the terminal device receives the synchronization signal from the third communication device and then establishes an RRC connection with it.
- the terminal device receives the synchronization signal from the second communication device but does not establish an RRC connection with it.
- the communication device that establishes an RRC connection with the terminal device can also be called the primary communication device (e.g., the primary satellite device); other communication devices that do not establish an RRC connection with the terminal device, but whose downlink synchronization is maintained by the terminal device, can be called secondary communication devices (e.g., secondary satellite devices).
- the terminal device Since the terminal device only establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, this scheme can reduce the complexity of the scheme on the terminal device side. Furthermore, since the terminal device can synchronize with multiple communication devices, it can decode data sent from multiple communication devices on the same resources and then recover the data sent by each of the multiple communication devices.
- Step 802 The third communication device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the first configuration information.
- the first configuration information includes information about one or more communication devices.
- the first configuration information may include information about a second communication device.
- the first configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range.
- This information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the second communication device is currently providing service to the first area.
- this information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the first information meets a first condition (see the description of the embodiment provided in Figure 2 above, which will not be repeated here), thereby providing a basis for whether to switch to an auxiliary communication device.
- the first configuration information further includes at least one of the following: ephemeris information of the second communication device and position information of a ground reference point.
- the position information of the ground reference point in the first configuration information is used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device. This information can help the terminal device to search for the synchronization signal of the second communication device more quickly, thereby improving communication efficiency.
- the first configuration information may include information about the first communication device.
- the first configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a second elevation angle range, a second orbital angle range, a time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area, a second Doppler range, a second Doppler rate range, a second TA range, a third TA rate of change range, and a fourth TA rate of change range.
- This information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the first communication device is currently or will be providing service to the first area in the future (e.g., after a first duration).
- this information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the second information meets the second condition (see the description of the embodiment provided in Figure 2 above, which will not be repeated here), thereby providing a basis for whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device.
- the first configuration information further includes at least one of the following: ephemeris information of the first communication device and location information of a ground reference point.
- the location information of the ground reference point in the first configuration information is used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device.
- the ground reference point used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device in the first configuration information and the ground reference point used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device in the first configuration information can be the same or two different ground reference points. This information can assist the terminal device in more quickly searching for the synchronization signal of the second communication device, thereby improving communication efficiency.
- the first configuration information may further include information on the priority of each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched).
- the first configuration information may indicate the priority of each communication device explicitly or implicitly.
- the first configuration information may include priority information for a first communication device, a second communication device, and a fourth communication device. The first configuration information indicates that the first communication device has a higher priority than the second communication device, and the second communication device has a higher priority than the fourth communication device.
- the terminal device may select the candidate auxiliary communication device with the highest priority, i.e., the second communication device, based on the priority of the candidate auxiliary communication devices indicated by the first configuration information. If the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area, the terminal device switches the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device. If the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, or the second communication device is currently unavailable, the terminal device continues to determine whether the area served by the fourth communication device includes the first area. Similarly, if the area served by the fourth communication device includes the first area, the terminal device switches the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the fourth communication device.
- the relevant solutions can be found in the priority description in Figure 2 above, and will not be repeated here.
- the first configuration information may further include other information about the communication devices (e.g., the second communication device and/or the first communication device), such as the identifier of the communication device, downlink synchronization reference signal sequence information, downlink synchronization signal frequency, measurement timing configuration, polarization information, etc. This information can assist the terminal device in receiving the synchronization signals from these communication devices, thereby accelerating the synchronization signal search process and improving communication efficiency.
- the communication devices e.g., the second communication device and/or the first communication device
- This information can assist the terminal device in receiving the synchronization signals from these communication devices, thereby accelerating the synchronization signal search process and improving communication efficiency.
- Step 802 may be omitted, and the relevant content in the first configuration information may be pre-configured on the terminal device side or pre-defined by the protocol.
- Step 803 The first communication device sends a synchronization signal.
- the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the first communication device.
- the synchronization signal of the first communication device can be used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the first communication device.
- the terminal device can establish an RRC connection with the main communication device, i.e., the third communication device.
- the terminal device can choose not to establish an RRC connection with the auxiliary communication device (i.e., the first communication device).
- Step 803 may also be omitted.
- step 803 may be executed so that the terminal device can synchronize its downlink timing with both the first and third communication devices, thereby recovering the individual signals from the received superimposed signals.
- step 803 may also be omitted, and the terminal device can synchronize its downlink timing with the third communication device, thereby receiving signals.
- Step 804 The third communication device sends data to the terminal device on the second resource, and the first communication device sends data to the terminal device on the second resource.
- the terminal device receives data on the second resource.
- the data received by the terminal device on the second resource is the superimposed data sent by the third communication device and the first communication device.
- the second resource can be a time-domain resource, a frequency-domain resource, or a combination of both.
- Step 804 is an example. Step 804 may also be omitted.
- the first communication device may not send data jointly with the third communication device, the first communication device may not send data to the terminal device, or the first communication device may send data to the terminal device alone, or the third communication device may send data to the terminal device alone.
- Step 805 The terminal device obtains the first information and determines, based on the first information, that it needs to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
- the terminal device can determine, based on the first information and the first configuration information, that it needs to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device. For example, if the terminal device determines that the first information meets the first condition, it can determine that it needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device. Alternatively, if the terminal device determines that the first information meets the first condition and the second information does not meet the second condition, it can determine that it needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device. Yet another example, if the terminal device determines that the first information does not meet the first condition or the second information meets the second condition, it can determine that it does not need to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
- step 805 can be found in the relevant description of step 201 above, and will not be repeated here.
- Step 806 The third communication device obtains third information and determines, based on the third information, that the terminal device needs to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
- the implementation method by which the third communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the auxiliary communication device is similar to the scheme executed on the terminal device side, and can be found in the descriptions of the aforementioned implementation methods A1 and A2.
- the third communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the third information. For instance, if the third communication device determines that the third information meets the first condition, it can determine that the terminal device needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
- the third communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the third information and the sixth information. For instance, if the third communication device determines that the third information meets the first condition and the sixth information does not meet the second condition, it can determine that the terminal device needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
- the terminal device may determine that it does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
- the third information may include/can be replaced by: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
- the third information includes/is: information associated with the location of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device), and at least one of the following: information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the second communication device).
- the third communication device can obtain the third information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the second communication device.
- the third communication device can determine the third information based on a signal received from the second communication device.
- the third communication device can receive the third information from the terminal device or other devices.
- the method by which the third communication device obtains the third information can be found in the aforementioned description of the method by which the terminal device obtains the first information, and will not be repeated here.
- the third information acquired by the third communication device may be the same type as or different from the first information acquired by the terminal device.
- the first information may include time information, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the third information may also include time information, which the third communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
- the first information may include the elevation angle of the second communication device, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the third information may include time information, which the third communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
- the method by which the third communication device determines that the third information satisfies the first condition is similar to the method by which the terminal device determines that the first information satisfies the first condition.
- the content of the first condition is as described above and will not be repeated here.
- the third information satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the third information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
- the sixth information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after the first duration), or information for determining whether the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after the first duration) includes the first area.
- the sixth information may be inferred by the third communication device based on the current information of the first communication device and in combination with the ephemeris information of the first communication device.
- the relevant scheme can be referred to the aforementioned method of the terminal device obtaining the second information, which is similar and will not be repeated here.
- the sixth information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the first communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device), and information associated with the TA of the first communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the first communication device).
- information associated with the position of the first communication device e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device
- first time information e.g., current time information
- information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device
- information associated with the TA of the first communication device e.g.,
- the third communication device can obtain the sixth information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the first communication device.
- the third communication device can determine the sixth information based on a signal received from the first communication device.
- the third communication device can receive the sixth information from the terminal device or other devices.
- the method by which the third communication device obtains the sixth information can be found in the aforementioned description of how the terminal device obtains the second information, and will not be repeated here.
- the sixth information acquired by the third communication device may be the same type as or different from the second information acquired by the terminal device.
- the second information may include time information; the sixth information may also include time information.
- the second information may include the elevation angle of the first communication device; the sixth information may include time information.
- the method by which the third communication device determines that the sixth information cannot satisfy the second condition is similar to the method described above for determining that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition.
- the content of the second condition is as described above and will not be repeated here.
- the sixth information may fail to meet the second condition if at least one of the following is true: the elevation angle (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the sixth information (current or after the first duration) does not fall within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first Doppler rate range; the TA (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first TA range; the TA change rate (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first TA
- step 806 can be found in the scheme of the terminal device determining the need to switch to the auxiliary communication device in step 201 above. It is similar and will not be repeated here.
- the third communication device may receive signaling from other communication devices (e.g., terminal devices) to notify the third communication device that the terminal device has switched to the second communication device.
- other communication devices e.g., terminal devices
- Step 807 The third communication device sends the second configuration information to the second communication device.
- the second communication device receives the second configuration information.
- the second configuration information includes, for example, information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first region, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range.
- the second configuration information also includes information indicating the first region.
- the second configuration information can be associated with the first area.
- the second configuration information also includes information for indicating the first area.
- Information for indicating the first area includes: wave position information within the first area, and/or, the location information of the terminal device.
- the location information of the terminal device may include, for example, the coordinates of the terminal device's location in a coordinate system, or the administrative location of the terminal device, such as its street number.
- a wave position can be understood as a defined location area on the ground; wave position information may include, for example, information for identifying the wave position, such as a wave position identifier.
- wave positions and areas please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
- the second configuration information is used by the second communication device to determine the timing for sending a synchronization signal to the first region. For example, when the second communication device determines that one or more of the second configuration information is satisfied, it can begin sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period).
- the second communication device when it determines that one or more of the second configuration information cannot be satisfied, it can stop sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period; or, for example, the second communication device can periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a third duration as the period, where the third duration can be longer than the second duration). It can be seen that in these schemes, with the assistance of the second configuration information, the second communication device can control the number and frequency of synchronization signals sent to the first region, avoiding the need for continuously sending synchronization signals to the first region at a high frequency, thus saving resource overhead.
- Step 808 The second communication device acquires fourth information, and if the fourth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, it sends a synchronization signal to the first area.
- the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the second communication device.
- Step 808 can also be replaced by: the second communication device acquiring fourth information, and if the fourth information indicates that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area, determining that the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device. If the second communication device determines that the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device, it sends a synchronization signal to the first area, or begins periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration.
- the implementation method of the second communication device determining whether the terminal device needs to switch to the auxiliary communication device is similar to the scheme executed on the terminal device side, and can be found in the descriptions of the aforementioned implementation methods A1 and A2.
- the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the fourth information. For example, if the second communication device determines that the fourth information meets the first condition, it may send a synchronization signal to the first area, or start periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (or determine that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device).
- the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the fourth and sixth information. For example, if the second communication device determines that the fourth information meets the first condition and the seventh information does not meet the second condition, it may send a synchronization signal to the first area, or start periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (or determine that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device).
- the second communication device determines that the fourth information does not meet the first condition or the seventh information meets the second condition, it can determine that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device, and may not send a synchronization signal to the first area, or may not periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (for example, it may periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area with a third duration).
- the fourth information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
- the fourth information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device), and information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the second communication device).
- information associated with the position of the second communication device e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device
- first time information e.g., current time information
- information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device
- information associated with the TA of the second communication device e.g.,
- the second communication device can obtain the fourth information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the second communication device.
- the second communication device can determine the fourth information based on information received from other communication devices (such as the third communication device).
- the second communication device can receive the fourth information from the terminal device or other devices.
- the method by which the second communication device obtains the fourth information can be found in the aforementioned description of the method by which the terminal device obtains the first information, and will not be repeated here.
- the fourth information acquired by the second communication device may be the same type as or different from the first information acquired by the terminal device.
- the first information may include time information, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fourth information may also include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
- the first information may include the elevation angle of the second communication device, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fourth information may include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
- the method by which the second communication device determines that the fourth information satisfies the first condition is similar to the method by which the terminal device determines that the first information satisfies the first condition.
- the content of the first condition can be found in the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
- the fourth information satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fourth information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
- the seventh information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration), or information for determining whether the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration) includes the first area.
- the seventh information may be inferred by the second communication device based on the current information of the first communication device and in conjunction with the ephemeris information of the first communication device. Similar schemes can be found in the aforementioned method for the terminal device to obtain the second information, and will not be elaborated further.
- the seventh information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the first communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device (e.g., the Doppler corresponding to the first communication device and the Doppler rate), and information associated with the TA of the first communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA corresponding to the first communication device, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA).
- information associated with the position of the first communication device e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device
- first time information e.g., current time information
- information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device e.g., the Doppler corresponding to the first communication device and the Doppler rate
- information associated with the TA of the first communication device e.g
- the second communication device can obtain the seventh information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the first communication device.
- the second communication device can determine the seventh information based on information received from other communication devices (such as the third communication device).
- the second communication device can receive the seventh information from the terminal device or other devices.
- the method by which the second communication device obtains the seventh information can be found in the aforementioned description of how the terminal device obtains the second information, and will not be repeated here.
- the type of the seventh information acquired by the second communication device may be the same as or different from the type of the second information acquired by the terminal device.
- the second information may include time information; the seventh information may also include time information.
- the second information may include the elevation angle of the first communication device; the seventh information may include time information.
- the method by which the second communication device determines that the seventh information cannot satisfy the second condition is similar to the method described above for determining that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition.
- the content of the second condition is as described above and will not be repeated here.
- the seventh information failing to meet the second condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the seventh information (current or after the first duration) does not belong to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first Doppler rate range; the TA (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first TA range; the TA change rate (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information
- step 808 can be found in the scheme of the terminal device determining the need to switch to the auxiliary communication device in step 201 above. It is similar and will not be repeated here.
- Steps 808, 806, and 805 may not have a sequential relationship; they may be executed simultaneously or not simultaneously.
- Figure 8 shows one possible example. In actual applications, steps 808 or 806 may be executed before step 805, or step 805 may be executed between steps 808 and 806, or step 806 may be executed after step 808, etc.
- step 808 when the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first area, the terminal device can begin receiving the synchronization signal from the second communication device. In another possible implementation, when the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first area, and the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the second communication device, the terminal device can begin receiving the synchronization signal from the second communication device. This saves power on the terminal device.
- the second communication device may receive signaling from other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to notify the second communication device to begin sending a synchronization signal to the first area, or to periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration.
- the second communication device may receive signaling from other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to notify the second communication device to stop sending a synchronization signal to the first area, or to stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration, or to begin periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area for a third duration.
- Step 809 The terminal device switches to the second communication device.
- Step 809 may include the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device. Step 809 may be replaced by at least one of the following: stopping receiving synchronization signals from the first communication device; receiving synchronization signals from the second communication device, wherein the synchronization signals from the second communication device are used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the second communication device.
- step 809 The content of step 809 can be found in the description of step 202 above, and will not be repeated here.
- Step 810 The third communication device sends the second data to the terminal device from the first resource.
- step 810 The content of step 810 can be found in the description of step 203 above, and will not be repeated here.
- Step 811 The second communication device sends the first data to the terminal device from the first resource.
- the terminal device receives first data and second data on the first resource.
- step 811 can be found in the description of step 204 above, and will not be repeated here.
- Step 812 The terminal device acquires the first data and the second data.
- step 812 can be found in the description of step 205 above, and will not be repeated here.
- Step 813 The second communication device obtains the fifth information. If the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area, then: stop sending synchronization signals to the first area or stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area for a second duration.
- Step 813 can also be replaced by: the second communication device acquiring the fifth information, and if the fifth information indicates that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, determining that the terminal device needs to switch from the second communication device to another auxiliary communication device. If the second communication device determines that the terminal device needs to switch from the second communication device to another auxiliary communication device, it stops sending synchronization signals to the first area, or stops periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration.
- the second communication device's cessation of periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration can be replaced by periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a third duration, where the third duration is longer than the second duration.
- the implementation method by which the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to an auxiliary communication device is similar to the scheme executed on the terminal device side, as described in the aforementioned implementation method A1. For example, the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch from the second communication device to another auxiliary communication device based on the content of the fifth information. For example, if the second communication device determines that the fifth information does not meet the first condition, it stops sending synchronization signals to the first area or stops periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration.
- the second communication device determines that the fifth information meets the first condition, it can determine that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the second communication device to another communication device, and can continue to periodically send synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration.
- the fifth piece of information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
- the fifth information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device, the Doppler rate), and information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA corresponding to the second communication device, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA).
- information associated with the position of the second communication device e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device
- first time information e.g., current time information
- information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device e.g., the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device, the Doppler rate
- information associated with the TA of the second communication device e.g
- the second communication device can obtain the fifth information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the second communication device.
- the second communication device can determine the fifth information based on information received from other communication devices (such as the third communication device).
- the second communication device can receive the fifth information from the terminal device or other devices.
- the method by which the second communication device obtains the fifth information can be found in the aforementioned description of the method by which the terminal device obtains the first information, and will not be repeated here.
- the fifth piece of information acquired by the second communication device may be the same type as or different from the first piece of information acquired by the terminal device.
- the first piece of information may include time information, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fifth piece of information may also include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
- the first piece of information may include the elevation angle of the second communication device, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fifth piece of information may include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
- the fifth information not satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fifth information does not belong to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the second TA change rate range.
- This application embodiment uses a second communication device as an example to describe the process of a third communication device sending second configuration information to the second communication device, the second communication device sending data to the terminal device, and the second communication device determining to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area or to stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area for a second duration.
- auxiliary communication devices such as the first communication device
- a similar process to that of the second communication device can be performed.
- the third communication device can send configuration information (which can be similar to the second configuration information) to the first communication device, the first communication device can send data to the terminal device (e.g., the aforementioned step 804), and the first communication device can also determine to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area or to stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area for a duration (e.g., the second duration) (this step can refer to the scheme on the second communication device side in the aforementioned step 813, which is similar and will not be described again).
- a duration e.g., the second duration
- the second communication device can determine the transmission time and frequency of the synchronization signal based on certain information. For example, if the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device is within the first elevation angle range, the second communication device can start (or periodically transmit the synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration).
- the second communication device can stop (or stop periodically transmitting the synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration) (for example, it can periodically transmit the synchronization signal to the first area with a third duration).
- This method allows the second communication device to avoid continuously transmitting the synchronization signal to the first area at a high frequency, thereby saving resource consumption and reducing signal interference in the communication system.
- the first communication device may also perform the same scheme as the second communication device. For example, the first communication device may start sending a synchronization signal to the first area or start periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration if it determines that the terminal device needs to set the auxiliary communication device as the first communication device. The first communication device may also stop sending a synchronization signal to the first area or stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration if it determines that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
- the information that the third communication device needs to send (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.) can be carried in at least one of the broadcast information of system information block (SIB) 1, other system information (OSI), and main system information block (MIB), and broadcast or multicast to the terminal device by the third communication device.
- SIB system information block
- OSI system information
- MIB main system information block
- the third communication device sends information (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.) during the radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment phase and subsequent communication
- this information can be carried in at least one of the following: RRC signaling (e.g., RRC setup message, RRC reconfiguration message, RRC resume message, etc.), downlink control information (DCI), group DCI, and media access control (MAC) control element (CE).
- RRC signaling e.g., RRC setup message, RRC reconfiguration message, RRC resume message, etc.
- DCI downlink control information
- group DCI group DCI
- CE media access control element
- This information can be indicated by signaling or by tables.
- the information that the third communication device needs to send can be carried with data transmission or in a separately allocated physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
- PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
- the information that the third communication device needs to indicate can be sent via unicast or multicast. In this way, this information corresponding to each/group of terminal devices can be
- the third communication device, the second communication device, the first communication device, and the terminal device may include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
- this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application scenario and design constraints of the technical solution.
- Figures 9, 10, and 11 are schematic diagrams of possible communication devices provided in embodiments of this application. These communication devices shown in Figures 9, 10, and 11 can be used to implement the functions of the terminal device, third communication device, or second communication device in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments.
- the communication device can be a terminal device as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, or 1G; it can also be a network device (such as a satellite device or a network device deployed on the ground) as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, or 1G; or it can be a chip (or chip system) applied to the terminal device or network device shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, or 1G.
- a network device such as a satellite device or a network device deployed on the ground
- chip or chip system
- the communication device 1300 includes a processing unit 1310 and a transceiver unit 1320.
- the communication device 1300 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device, the third communication device, or the second communication device in the method embodiments shown in Figure 2 or Figure 8.
- the transceiver unit 1320 can also be referred to as a communication unit.
- the transceiver unit 1320 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to acquire first information, and when the first information indicates that the area provided by the second communication device includes the first area, switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive first data and second data.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to determine, when the first information satisfies the first condition, that the area in which the first information indicates the second communication device to provide services includes the first area.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive first configuration information.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain second information before switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, and determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area when the second information cannot meet the second condition.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to stop receiving the synchronization signal from the first communication device.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive a synchronization signal from the second communication device.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain third information, and when the third information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, it determines that the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send second data to the terminal device from the first resource, and the first resource is also used for the second communication device to send first data to the terminal device.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to determine, when the third information satisfies the first condition, that the area in which the third information indicates the second communication device to provide services includes the first area.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send first configuration information.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send second configuration information to the second communication device.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain sixth information and determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area if the sixth information cannot satisfy the second condition.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to acquire fourth information, and when the fourth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send a synchronization signal to the first area.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send first data to the terminal device in the first resource.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to send a synchronization signal to the first area through the transceiver unit 1320 when the fourth information satisfies the first condition.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain fifth information and determine to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area if the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to determine to stop sending the synchronization signal to the first area if the fifth information does not meet the first condition.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to stop sending synchronization signals to the first region; and to stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first region with a second duration.
- the processing unit 1310 is used to periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region through the transceiver unit 1320 with a third duration as the period when the fifth information does not meet the first condition, and the third duration is longer than the second duration.
- the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive the second configuration information.
- the communication device 1400 includes a processor 1410 and an interface circuit 1420.
- the processor 1410 and the interface circuit 1420 are coupled to each other.
- the interface circuit 1420 can be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
- the input/output interface is used for inputting and/or outputting information; output can be understood as sending, and input can be understood as receiving.
- the communication device 1400 may also include a memory 1430 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1410, or storing input data required by the processor 1410 to execute instructions, or storing data generated after the processor 1410 executes instructions.
- the processor 1410 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1310
- the interface circuit 1420 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1320.
- the communication device shown in Figure 11 can also be a schematic diagram of a possible baseband architecture.
- the communication device may include a processing system, which may include one or more processors.
- the processors can be used to execute processes, such as process #1...process #N shown in Figure 11.
- a processing system can be implemented using a bus architecture, typically represented by a bus.
- a bus can include any number of interconnect buses and bridges, depending on the specific application and overall design constraints of the processing system.
- the bus communicatively couples various circuits together, including one or more processors (typically represented by a processor), memory, and computer-readable media (typically represented by computer-readable media, such as computer-readable media #1...computer-readable media #N shown in Figure 11).
- the bus can also link various other circuits, such as timing sources, peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art and therefore will not be described further.
- the bus interface provides the interface between the bus and transceivers, and between the bus and the interface.
- the communication device may also include a transceiver (not shown in Figure 11), which may be replaced by interface circuitry or a communication interface, etc.
- the transceiver provides a communication interface or means for communicating with various other devices via a wireless transmission medium.
- the transceiver may be coupled to an antenna array, and the transceiver and antenna array may be used together for communication with a corresponding network type.
- At least one interface e.g., a network interface and/or a user interface provides a communication interface or means for communication via an internal bus or via an external transmission medium.
- the processor is responsible for managing the bus and general processing, including executing software stored on a computer-readable medium.
- the processor executes the software, it causes the processing system to perform the various functions described below for any particular device.
- Functions that can be implemented by the processor, memory, and computer-readable medium may include: encoding, decoding, rate matching, rate dematching, scrambling, descrambling, modulation, demodulation, layer mapping, fast Fourier transform (FFT), inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT), inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT), precoding, resource element (RE) mapping, channel equalization, RE demapping, digital beamforming (BF), adding CP, removing CP, and one or more of the following.
- the signaling involved in the embodiments of this application can be implemented by a processor, a memory, and a computer-readable medium.
- a processor such as a satellite device
- the aforementioned signaling sent by a third communication device such as a satellite device
- the processor, memory, and computer-readable medium shown in FIG11 after processing the aforementioned parameters, and then sent to the terminal device.
- the processor 1410 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1310
- the interface circuit 1420 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1320.
- the terminal chip When the aforementioned communication device (e.g., the communication device shown in Figures 9, 10, or 11) is a chip applied to a terminal, the terminal chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments.
- the terminal chip receives information from a base station, which can be understood as the information being first received by other modules in the terminal (such as an RF module or antenna), and then sent to the terminal chip by these modules.
- the terminal chip sends information to the base station, which can be understood as the information being first sent to other modules in the terminal (such as an RF module or antenna), and then sent to the base station by these modules.
- the base station chip When the aforementioned communication device (e.g., the communication device shown in Figures 9, 10, or 11) is a chip applied to a base station (e.g., a satellite base station), the base station chip implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments.
- the base station chip receives information from the terminal, which can be understood as the information being first received by other modules in the base station (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), and then sent to the base station chip by these modules.
- the base station chip sends information to the terminal, which can be understood as the information being sent down to other modules in the base station (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), and then sent to the terminal by these modules.
- Entities A and B can be RAN nodes or terminals, or modules within RAN nodes or terminals. Information transmission and reception can be between RAN nodes and terminals, such as between a base station and a terminal; between two RAN nodes, such as between a CU and a DU; or between different modules within a single device, such as between a terminal chip and other modules of the terminal, or between a base station chip and other modules of the base station.
- processor 1410 in FIG. 10 and/or the processor in the processing system in FIG. 11 may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof.
- CPU Central Processing Unit
- DSP digital signal processors
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
- FPGAs field-programmable gate arrays
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
- the method steps in the embodiments of this application can be implemented in hardware or in software instructions executable by a processor.
- the software instructions can consist of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, registers, hard disks, portable hard disks, compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or any other form of storage medium well known in the art.
- An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor, enabling the processor to read information from and write information to the storage medium.
- the storage medium can also be a component of the processor.
- the processor and storage medium can reside in an ASIC. Alternatively, the ASIC can reside in a base station or terminal.
- the processor and storage medium can also exist as discrete components in a base station or terminal.
- implementation can be achieved, in whole or in part, through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- software When implemented using software, it can be implemented, in whole or in part, as a computer program product.
- a computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When a computer program or instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions of the embodiments of this application are performed.
- the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device.
- the computer program or instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transferred from one computer-readable storage medium to another.
- a computer program or instructions can be transferred from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired or wireless means.
- the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media.
- the available medium can be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, hard disk, or magnetic tape; it can also be an optical medium, such as a digital video optical disc; or it can be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid-state drive.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be a volatile or non-volatile storage medium, or may include both types of storage media.
- At least one means one or more, and “more than one” means two or more.
- “And/or” describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist.
- a and/or B can represent: A alone, A and B simultaneously, or B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.
- the character “/” generally indicates an “or” relationship between the preceding and following related objects; in the formulas of this application, the character “/” indicates a “division” relationship between the preceding and following related objects.
- “Including at least one of A, B, or C” can mean: including A; including B; including C; including A and B; including A and C; including B and C; including A, B, and C.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本申请要求在2024年04月26日提交中华人民共和国国家知识产权局、申请号为202410516629.5、申请名称为“一种通信方法、装置、存储介质以及计算机程序产品”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Chinese Patent Application No. 202410516629.5, filed on April 26, 2024, entitled "A Communication Method, Apparatus, Storage Medium and Computer Program Product", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法、装置、存储介质以及计算机程序产品。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product.
目前,第五代移动网络(the 5th generation,5G)新空口(new radio,NR)技术正在从版本(revision,R)18版本演进到R19版本。与此同时,NR技术也从标准化阶段进入到商业部署阶段。NR标准协议可以为地面蜂窝网络场景设计的无线通信技术,能够为用户提供超低时延、超可靠性、超高速率、超量连接的无线通信服务。相比于陆地通信,非陆地网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN)通信具有覆盖区域大、组网灵活等特点,可以做到全球网络无缝覆盖。NTN通信包括利用无人机、高空平台、卫星等设备进行组网,为用户终端(user equipment,UE)提供数据传输、语音通信等服务。目前,如何提高通信性能为目前亟需解决的问题。Currently, the 5G New Radio (NR) technology is evolving from revision (R) 18 to revision (R19). Simultaneously, NR technology has moved from the standardization phase to the commercial deployment phase. The NR standard protocol is a wireless communication technology designed for terrestrial cellular network scenarios, providing users with ultra-low latency, ultra-reliability, ultra-high speed, and massive connectivity wireless communication services. Compared to terrestrial communication, non-terrestrial networks (NTN) communication features large coverage areas and flexible networking, achieving seamless global network coverage. NTN communication utilizes equipment such as drones, high-altitude platforms, and satellites to provide data transmission and voice communication services to user equipment (UE). Improving communication performance is currently a pressing issue that needs to be addressed.
本申请提供一种通信方法、装置、存储介质以及计算机程序产品,用于基于第一信息确定是否需要切换至第二通信装置,该通信装置切换方案可以节省信令开销,降低资源开销,继而提高通信性能。This application provides a communication method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product for determining whether to switch to a second communication device based on first information. This communication device switching scheme can save signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, and thereby improve communication performance.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置可以与多个通信装置通信。例如,终端装置可能与一个通信装置建立无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接,与其他通信装置未建立RRC连接。例如与终端装置建立RRC连接的通信装置可以称为主通信装置,与终端装置未建立RRC连接的通信装置可以称为辅通信装置。主通信装置与一个或多个辅通信装置可以在相同的资源上向同一个终端装置发送相同或不同的数据。该方案可以提高通信系统性能和/或吞吐量。该场景下终端装置可能会需要切换辅卫星装置。如果辅卫星装置的切换每次都需要主通信装置进行判断并下发切换指令等,则会导致信令开销较大,继而导致主通信装置的负荷量加大。In one possible implementation, the terminal device can communicate with multiple communication devices. For example, the terminal device may establish a radio resource control (RRC) connection with one communication device but not with other communication devices. The communication device with which the terminal device has an RRC connection can be called the primary communication device, and the communication devices without an RRC connection can be called secondary communication devices. The primary communication device and one or more secondary communication devices can send the same or different data to the same terminal device on the same resources. This scheme can improve the performance and/or throughput of the communication system. In this scenario, the terminal device may need to switch to a secondary satellite device. If the primary communication device needs to make a judgment and issue a switching command every time a secondary satellite device switches, it will result in high signaling overhead, thereby increasing the load on the primary communication device.
针对上述问题,本申请提供一种方案,该方案中,终端装置可以基于第一信息确定是否需要切换通信装置。例如第一信息可以用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域,终端装置基于第一信息确定第二通信装置服务的区域包括终端装置所在区域,则可以从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。该方案中,终端装置基于第一信息判断是否切换通信装置,无需主通信装置向终端装置下发切换指令,该方案可以节省信令开销,降低资源开销,继而提高通信性能。To address the aforementioned problems, this application provides a solution in which the terminal device can determine whether to switch communication devices based on first information. For example, the first information can be used to determine the area served by the second communication device. If the terminal device determines, based on the first information, that the area served by the second communication device includes the area where the terminal device is located, it can then switch from the first communication device to the second communication device. In this solution, the terminal device determines whether to switch communication devices based on the first information, eliminating the need for the primary communication device to issue a switching command to the terminal device. This solution can save signaling overhead, reduce resource consumption, and thereby improve communication performance.
又一方面,第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向同一个终端装置发送数据,如此可以提高通信性能。例如第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向同一个终端装置发送不同数据,则可以提高数据传输效率,提高通信系统的吞吐量。又例如第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向同一个终端装置发送相同数据,则可以提高数据传输的可靠性。On the other hand, the second and third communication devices can improve communication performance by sending data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources). For example, sending different data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources) can improve data transmission efficiency and increase the throughput of the communication system. Furthermore, sending the same data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources) can improve the reliability of data transmission.
第一方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端装置执行。终端装置可以包括终端设备或终端设备内部的芯片系统。Firstly, this application provides a communication method that can be executed by a terminal device. The terminal device may include a terminal equipment or a chip system within the terminal equipment.
终端装置获取第一信息。第一信息用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域。终端装置在第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置,第一区域包括终端装置所在的区域。The terminal device acquires first information. The first information is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the first information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes a first area, the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device, where the first area includes the area where the terminal device is located.
由于终端装置基于第一信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置,因此该过程中无需主通信装置向终端装置下发切换指令,该方案可以节省信令开销,降低资源开销,继而提高通信性能。Since the terminal device determines whether to switch to the second communication device based on the first information, the main communication device does not need to issue a switching command to the terminal device during this process. This scheme can save signaling overhead, reduce resource overhead, and thus improve communication performance.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置在第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下,确定无需切换至第二通信装置。终端装置可以继续与第一通信装置通信,或者继续判断下一个候选辅通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。In one possible implementation, if the first information indicates that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, the terminal device determines that it does not need to switch to the second communication device. The terminal device can continue to communicate with the first communication device, or continue to determine whether the area served by the next candidate auxiliary communication device includes the first area.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置与第三通信装置建立RRC连接,终端装置与第二通信装置未建立RRC连接,终端装置与第一通信装置未建立RRC连接。In one possible implementation, the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device or the first communication device.
该示例中,第三通信装置可以视为主通信装置,第一通信装置和第二通信装置可以视为两个辅通信装置。主通信装置和辅通信装置可以向终端装置发送数据,可以分别单独向终端装置发送数据,也可以联合向终端装置发送数据。例如主通信装置和辅通信装置可以在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据,主通信装置和辅通信装置发送的数据可以相同或不同。该方案可以提高通信系统的性能和/或吞吐量。辅通信装置向终端装置发送的数据和资源可以由主通信装置来通知,或者由其他装置来通知,或者由辅通信装置根据预设规则确定。主通信装置和辅通信装置也可以在不同的资源(例如不同的时域资源和不同频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据。In this example, the third communication device can be considered the primary communication device, and the first and second communication devices can be considered two secondary communication devices. The primary and secondary communication devices can send data to the terminal device, either individually or jointly. For example, the primary and secondary communication devices can send data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources), and the data sent by the primary and secondary communication devices can be the same or different. This scheme can improve the performance and/or throughput of the communication system. The data and resources sent by the secondary communication devices to the terminal device can be notified by the primary communication device, by other devices, or determined by the secondary communication device according to preset rules. The primary and secondary communication devices can also send data to the terminal device on different resources (e.g., different time-domain and different frequency-domain resources).
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置接收第一数据和第二数据,第一数据来自第二通信装置,第二数据来自第三通信装置,第一数据占用第一资源,第二数据占用第一资源。In one possible implementation, the terminal device receives first data and second data, the first data comes from a second communication device, the second data comes from a third communication device, the first data occupies a first resource, and the second data occupies a first resource.
第一数据和第二数据可以相同或不同。例如,第一资源可以包括/为时域资源或频域资源。又例如,第一资源可以包括/为时域资源和频域资源。例如,第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向同一个终端装置发送数据,如此可以提高通信性能。例如第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向同一个终端装置发送不同数据,则可以提高数据传输效率,提高通信系统的吞吐量。又例如第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向同一个终端装置发送相同数据,则可以提高数据传输的可靠性。The first data and the second data can be the same or different. For example, the first resource may include/be a time-domain resource or a frequency-domain resource. As another example, the first resource may include/be a time-domain resource and a frequency-domain resource. For example, if the second communication device and the third communication device send data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), communication performance can be improved. For example, if the second communication device and the third communication device send different data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), data transmission efficiency can be improved, increasing the throughput of the communication system. As another example, if the second communication device and the third communication device send the same data to the same terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), data transmission reliability can be improved.
一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息包括以下至少一项:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息;时间信息(例如当前时间);与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息;与第二通信装置的时间提前量(timing advance,TA)关联的信息。这些信息终端装置较易获取,从而可以降低方案复杂度。例如终端装置根据时间信息可以确定是否需要切换辅通信装置,该方案可以降低对终端装置的硬件的能力要求,该方案可以适用于能力较弱(例如无定位功能)的终端装置。In one possible implementation, the first information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information (e.g., current time); information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the timing advance (TA) of the second communication device. This information is readily available to the terminal device, thereby reducing the complexity of the solution. For example, the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device based on the time information. This solution reduces the hardware requirements of the terminal device and is applicable to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (e.g., no positioning function).
一种可能的实施方式中,与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息包括:第二通信装置对应的仰角;和/或,第二通信装置对应的轨道角度。例如,第二通信装置对应的仰角包括以终端装置为起点射向第二通信装置的线与线在水平面上的投影之间的夹角。例如,第二通信装置对应的轨道角度包括:第二通信装置的轨道上的点与第二通信装置的轨道中心的连线,以及第二通信装置的轨道的参考点与第二通信装置的轨道中心的连线之间的夹角。In one possible implementation, the information associated with the position of the second communication device includes: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device; and/or, the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device includes the angle between a line originating from the terminal device and directed toward the second communication device and the projection of that line onto a horizontal plane. For example, the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device includes: the angle between a line connecting a point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device, and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息包括:第二通信装置的对应的多普勒;和/或,第二通信装置对应的多普勒率。In one possible implementation, the information associated with the Doppler of the signal from the second communication device includes: the corresponding Doppler of the second communication device; and/or, the Doppler rate of the second communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息包括以下至少一项:第二通信装置对应的TA;第二通信装置对应的TA变化率;第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率。In one possible implementation, the information associated with the TA of the second communication device includes at least one of the following: the TA corresponding to the second communication device; the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device; and the rate of change of the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置在第一信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置在第一信息不满足第一条件的情况下,确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In one possible implementation, if the first information satisfies a first condition, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information instructs the second communication device to provide services includes the first area. In another possible implementation, if the first information does not satisfy the first condition, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information instructs the second communication device to provide services does not include the first area.
例如,第一条件包括以下至少一项:第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围;第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围;时间信息指示的时间属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围;第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围;第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围;第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围;第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围。For example, the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the second TA change rate range.
通过上述实施方式可以看出,终端装置可以基于第一信息与一些参数范围或时间段的比较结果,确定是否需要切换辅通信装置。第一信息对于终端装置而言,较容易获取,该方案可以降低方案复杂度。例如终端装置根据时间信息可以确定是否需要切换辅通信装置,该方案可以降低对终端装置的硬件的能力要求,该方案可以适用于能力较弱(例如无定位功能)的终端装置。As can be seen from the above implementation methods, the terminal device can determine whether to switch to an auxiliary communication device based on a comparison of the first information with some parameter ranges or time periods. The first information is relatively easy for the terminal device to obtain, thus reducing the complexity of the solution. For example, the terminal device can determine whether to switch to an auxiliary communication device based on time information. This solution reduces the hardware requirements of the terminal device and is applicable to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (e.g., without positioning functionality).
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置接收第一配置信息。其中,第一配置信息包括用于指示以下至少一项的信息:第一仰角范围、第一轨道角度范围、第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段、第一多普勒范围、第一多普勒率范围、第一TA范围、第一TA变化率范围,以及第二TA变化率范围。In one possible implementation, the terminal device receives first configuration information. The first configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range.
一种可能的实施方式中,第一配置信息还包括:第二通信装置的星历信息,和/或地面参考点的位置信息。地面参考点的位置信息用于确定第二通信装置对应的仰角。星历信息可以辅助终端装置确定是否需要切换辅通信装置。地面参考点可以为一个区域中的较为中心的点。当终端装置基于地面参考点计算第二通信装置对应的仰角时,可以无需确定终端装置的位置信息,该方案可以降低对终端装置的硬件能力的要求,该方案可以适用于能力较弱(例如无定位功能)的终端装置。In one possible implementation, the first configuration information further includes: ephemeris information of the second communication device, and/or location information of a ground reference point. The location information of the ground reference point is used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device. The ephemeris information can assist the terminal device in determining whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device. The ground reference point can be a relatively central point in a region. When the terminal device calculates the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device based on the ground reference point, it is not necessary to determine the location information of the terminal device. This scheme can reduce the hardware requirements of the terminal device and can be applied to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (e.g., without positioning functions).
一种可能的实施方式中,第一配置信息还指示:第一通信装置的优先级高于第二通信装置,第二通信装置为第一通信装置之后的优先级最高的待切换通信装置。该方案中第三通信装置可以依据各个通信装置为第一区域提供服务的先后顺序设置优先级,也可以参考一些其他信息,例如各个通信装置的信号的质量等设置优先级。终端装置可以依据第一配置信息指示的各个候选辅通信装置的优先级信息,依序判断各个候选辅通信装置是否能够切换成功,该方案可以使终端装置尽可能的快速的确定目标的辅通信装置,从而可以提高通信系统的效率。In one possible implementation, the first configuration information further indicates that the first communication device has a higher priority than the second communication device, and the second communication device is the highest priority communication device to be switched after the first communication device. In this scheme, the priority of the third communication device can be set according to the order in which each communication device provides services to the first area, or it can refer to other information, such as the signal quality of each communication device, to set its priority. The terminal device can sequentially determine whether each candidate auxiliary communication device can be successfully switched based on the priority information of each candidate auxiliary communication device indicated by the first configuration information. This scheme allows the terminal device to determine the target auxiliary communication device as quickly as possible, thereby improving the efficiency of the communication system.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置获取第二信息,第二信息用于确定当前或第一时长后第一通信装置提供服务的区域。终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置之前,还确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。又一种可能的实施方式中,第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,这种情况下,终端装置可以确定无需将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置。In one possible implementation, the terminal device acquires second information to determine the area where the first communication device provides service now or after a first duration. Before switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, the terminal device further determines that the area where the first communication device, indicated by the second information, provides service does not include the first area. In another possible implementation, if the area where the first communication device, indicated by the second information, provides service includes the first area, the terminal device can determine that it is not necessary to switch the secondary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
该方案中,终端装置需要在确定第一通信装置当前或即将无法为第一区域提供服务的情况下,确定需要将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置。该方案可以尽量延长第一通信装置为终端装置提供服务的时间,继而可以减少辅通信装置切换的频率,继而可以节省资源开销。In this scheme, the terminal device needs to determine whether to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device when it is determined that the first communication device is currently or about to be unable to provide service to the first area. This scheme can maximize the time that the first communication device provides service to the terminal device, thereby reducing the frequency of switching auxiliary communication devices and saving resource costs.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二信息包括以下至少一项:与第一通信装置的位置关联的信息;时间信息(例如当前时间或第一时长后的时间);与第一通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息;与第一通信装置的TA关联的信息。In one possible implementation, the second information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the first communication device; time information (e.g., current time or time after a first duration); information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device; and information associated with the TA of the first communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,与第一通信装置的位置关联的信息包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置对应的仰角;第一通信装置对应的轨道角度。例如,第一通信装置对应的仰角包括以终端装置为起点射向第一通信装置的线与线在水平面上的投影之间的夹角。例如,第一通信装置对应的轨道角度包括:第一通信装置的轨道上的点与第一通信装置的轨道中心的连线,以及第一通信装置的轨道的参考点与第一通信装置的轨道中心的连线之间的夹角。In one possible implementation, the information associated with the position of the first communication device includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device; and the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device. For example, the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device includes the angle between a line originating from the terminal device and directed toward the first communication device and the projection of that line onto a horizontal plane. For example, the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device includes the angle between a line connecting a point on the orbit of the first communication device and the center of the orbit of the first communication device, and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the first communication device and the center of the orbit of the first communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,与第一通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置的对应的多普勒;第一通信装置对应的多普勒率。In one possible implementation, the information associated with the Doppler of the signal from the first communication device includes at least one of the following: the corresponding Doppler of the first communication device; and the corresponding Doppler rate of the first communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,与第一通信装置的TA关联的信息包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置对应的TA;第一通信装置对应的TA变化率;第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率。In one possible implementation, the information associated with the TA of the first communication device includes at least one of the following: the TA corresponding to the first communication device; the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the first communication device; and the rate of change of the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the first communication device.
第二信息终端装置较易获取,从而可以降低方案复杂度。例如终端装置根据时间信息可以确定是否需要切换辅通信装置,该方案可以降低对终端装置的硬件的能力要求,该方案可以适用于能力较弱(例如无定位功能)的终端装置。The second information terminal device is relatively easy to obtain, thus reducing the complexity of the solution. For example, the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device based on time information. This solution can reduce the hardware capability requirements of the terminal device and can be applied to terminal devices with weaker capabilities (such as those without positioning functions).
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置在第二信息无法满足第二条件的情况下,确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。其中,第二条件包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置对应的仰角属于第二仰角范围;第一通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第二轨道角度范围;时间信息指示的时间属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第一通信装置对应的多普勒属于第二多普勒范围;第一通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第二多普勒率范围;第一通信装置对应的TA属于第二TA范围;第一通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第三TA变化率范围;第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第四TA变化率范围。In one possible implementation, if the second information fails to meet the second condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area. The second condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information belongs to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler effect corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a third TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a fourth TA change rate range.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二信息无法满足第二条件可以包括以下至少一项:第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的仰角不属于第二仰角范围;第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的轨道角度不属于第二轨道角度范围;第二信息中的时间信息指示的时间不属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒不属于第二多普勒范围;第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒率不属于第二多普勒率范围;第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA不属于第二TA范围;第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率不属于第三TA变化率范围;第二信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率不属于第四TA变化率范围。In one possible implementation, the inability of the second information to satisfy the second condition may include at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the second information does not belong to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler frequency corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second Doppler frequency range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second Doppler rate range; the TA frequency corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the second TA frequency range; the TA frequency change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the third TA frequency change rate range; and the TA frequency change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the second information does not belong to the fourth TA frequency change rate range.
又一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置在第二信息满足第二条件的情况下,确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域,这种情况下,终端装置可以确定无需将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置。In another possible implementation, if the second information satisfies the second condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information includes the first area. In this case, the terminal device can determine that there is no need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置,包括/为:终端装置停止接收来自第一通信装置的同步信号。如此,可以节省终端装置的资源开销和电量开销。In one possible implementation, the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device by: the terminal device ceasing to receive synchronization signals from the first communication device. This can save on the terminal device's resource and power consumption.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置,包括/为:终端装置接收来自第二通信装置的同步信号,第二通信装置的同步信号用于终端装置与第二通信装置定时同步。如此,终端装置可以与第二通信装置之间进行数据传输。In one possible implementation, the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device, including/compromising that the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the second communication device, the synchronization signal being used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the second communication device. In this way, the terminal device can transmit data with the second communication device.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置从第一通信装置切换之前,可以与第一通信装置之间进行数据传输。例如,从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置之前,终端装置接收来自第一通信装置的同步信号,第一通信装置的同步信号用于终端装置与第一通信装置定时同步。终端装置在第二资源上接收来自第一通信装置的数据,以及在第二资源上接收来自第三通信装置的数据。如此可以提高通信吞吐量。第三通信装置与第一通信装置向终端装置发送的数据可以相同或不同。第三通信装置和第一通信装置向终端装置发送数据所占用的资源可以相同(相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)或不同(不同时域资源,且不同的频域资源)。In one possible implementation, the terminal device can transmit data with the first communication device before switching from the first communication device. For example, before switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the first communication device, which is used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the first communication device. The terminal device receives data from the first communication device on a second resource, and also receives data from a third communication device on the second resource. This can improve communication throughput. The data sent to the terminal device by the third communication device and the first communication device can be the same or different. The resources occupied by the third communication device and the first communication device for sending data to the terminal device can be the same (same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources) or different (different time-domain resources and different frequency-domain resources).
第二方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由第三通信装置执行。第三通信装置可以包括网络设备或网络设备内部的芯片系统。例如,第三通信装置可以包括卫星装置或卫星装置内部的芯片(或芯片系统)。又例如,第三通信装置可以包括地面站或地面站内部的芯片(或芯片系统)。地面站例如可以包括部署于地面的网络设备(例如接入网设备))。Secondly, this application provides a communication method that can be executed by a third communication device. The third communication device may include a network device or a chip system within a network device. For example, the third communication device may include a satellite device or a chip (or chip system) within a satellite device. As another example, the third communication device may include a ground station or a chip (or chip system) within a ground station. The ground station may, for example, include network equipment (e.g., access network equipment) deployed on the ground.
第三通信装置获取第三信息,第三信息用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域。第三通信装置在第三信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,确定终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置,第一区域包括终端装置所在的区域。The third communication device acquires third information, which is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the third information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes a first area, the third communication device determines that the terminal device is switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, where the first area includes the area where the terminal device is located.
由于终端装置基于第一信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置,而第三通信装置基于第三信息判断终端装置是否切换至第二通信装置,该过程中第三通信装置和终端装置各自依据用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域的信息判断中装置是否切换至第二通信装置,该过程中无需主通信装置向终端装置下发切换指令,该方案可以节省信令开销。Since the terminal device determines whether to switch to the second communication device based on the first information, and the third communication device determines whether the terminal device should switch to the second communication device based on the third information, during this process, the third communication device and the terminal device each determine whether the terminal device should switch to the second communication device based on the information used to determine the area provided by the second communication device. During this process, there is no need for the main communication device to issue a switching command to the terminal device, and this scheme can save signaling overhead.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置在第三信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下,确定终端装置无需切换至第二通信装置。In one possible implementation, if the third communication device determines that the terminal device does not need to switch to the second communication device when the third information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置与第三通信装置建立RRC连接,终端装置与第二通信装置未建立RRC连接,终端装置与第一通信装置未建立RRC连接。相关内容和有益效果可以参见第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device, nor with the first communication device. Related details and beneficial effects can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置在第一资源向终端装置发送第二数据,第一资源还用于第二通信装置向终端装置发送第一数据。相关内容和有益效果可以参见第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the third communication device sends second data to the terminal device using the first resource, and the first resource is also used by the second communication device to send first data to the terminal device. Related details and beneficial effects can be found in the description of possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三信息包括以下至少一项:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息;时间信息(例如当前时间);与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息;与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息。第三信息中包括的上述各项内容可以参见前述第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the third information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information (e.g., current time); information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the TA of the second communication device. The contents of the third information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置在第三信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定第三信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置在第三信息不满足第一条件的情况下,确定第三信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。第一条件包括的内容可以参见前述第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, if the third information satisfies the first condition, the third communication device determines that the area in which the third information instructs the second communication device to provide services includes the first area. In another possible implementation, if the third information does not satisfy the first condition, the third communication device determines that the area in which the third information instructs the second communication device to provide services does not include the first area. The content of the first condition can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
第三信息满足第一条件包括以下至少一项:第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围;第三信息中的时间信息指示的时间属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围。The third information satisfies the first condition including at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the third information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置发送第一配置信息。第一配置信息相关内容和有益效果可以参见第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the third communication device sends first configuration information. The details and benefits of the first configuration information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置向第二通信装置发送第二配置信息,第二配置信息包括用于指示以下至少一项的信息:第一仰角范围、第一轨道角度范围、第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段、第一多普勒范围、第一多普勒率范围、第一TA范围、第一TA变化率范围,以及第二TA变化率范围。In one possible implementation, the third communication device sends second configuration information to the second communication device. The second configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first region, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二配置信息可以与第一区域关联。例如第二配置信息还包括:用于指示第一区域的信息。In one possible implementation, the second configuration information can be associated with the first region. For example, the second configuration information may also include information for indicating the first region.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二配置信息用于第二通信装置确定向第一区域发送同步信号的时间。例如,当第二通信装置确定第二配置信息中的一项或多项被满足的情况下,可以开始向第一区域发送同步信号(或以第二时长为周期,周期性向第一区域发送同步信号)。又例如,当第二通信装置确定第二配置信息中的一项或多项无法被满足的情况下,第二通信装置可以停止向第一区域发送同步信号(或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,又例如第二通信装置可以以第三时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,第三时长可以大于第二时长)。可以看出,这些方案中,第三通信装置在第二配置信息的辅助下,可以控制向第一区域发送同步信号的数量和频率,不必一直持续高频率的向第一区域发送同步信号,该方案可以节省资源开销。In one possible implementation, the second configuration information is used by the second communication device to determine the timing for sending a synchronization signal to the first region. For example, when the second communication device determines that one or more of the second configuration information is satisfied, it can begin sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period). Alternatively, when the second communication device determines that one or more of the second configuration information cannot be satisfied, it can stop sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period; or, for example, the second communication device can periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a third duration as the period, where the third duration can be longer than the second duration). It can be seen that in these schemes, with the assistance of the second configuration information, the third communication device can control the number and frequency of synchronization signals sent to the first region, avoiding the need for continuously sending synchronization signals to the first region at a high frequency, thus saving resource overhead.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置获取第六信息,第六信息用于确定当前或第一时长后第一通信装置提供服务的区域。第三通信装置确定终端装置切换至第二通信装置之前确定第六信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。又一种可能的实施方式中,第六信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,第三通信装置可以确定终端装置无需将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置。该方案中,第三通信装置需要在确定第一通信装置当前或即将无法为第一区域提供服务的情况下,确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置。该方案可以尽量延长第一通信装置为终端装置提供服务的时间,继而可以减少辅通信装置切换的频率,继而可以节省资源开销。In one possible implementation, the third communication device acquires sixth information, which is used to determine the area where the first communication device provides service now or after a first duration. Before the terminal device switches to the second communication device, the third communication device determines that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area. In another possible implementation, if the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information includes the first area, the third communication device can determine that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device. In this scheme, the third communication device needs to determine that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device when it determines that the first communication device is currently or will soon be unable to provide service to the first area. This scheme can maximize the time that the first communication device provides service to the terminal device, thereby reducing the frequency of auxiliary communication device switching and saving resource costs.
一种可能的实施方式中,第六信息包括以下至少一项:与第一通信装置的位置关联的信息;时间信息(例如当前时间或第一时长后的时间);与第一通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息;与第一通信装置的TA关联的信息。第六信息中包括的上述各项内容可以参见前述第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the sixth information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the first communication device; time information (e.g., current time or time after a first duration); information associated with the Doppler signal of the first communication device; and information associated with the TA of the first communication device. The contents of the sixth information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置在第六信息无法满足第二条件的情况下,确定第六信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。又一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置在第六信息满足第二条件的情况下,确定第六信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域,这种情况下,第三通信装置确定终端装置无需将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置。其中,第二条件包括的各项内容可以参见前述第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, if the sixth information fails to satisfy the second condition, the third communication device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area. In another possible implementation, if the sixth information satisfies the second condition, the third communication device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information includes the first area. In this case, the third communication device determines that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device. The contents of the second condition can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第六信息无法满足第二条件包括以下至少一项:第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的仰角不属于第二仰角范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的轨道角度不属于第二轨道角度范围;第六信息中的时间信息指示的时间不属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒不属于第二多普勒范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒率不属于第二多普勒率范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA不属于第二TA范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率不属于第三TA变化率范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率不属于第四TA变化率范围。In one possible implementation, the sixth information failing to satisfy the second condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the sixth information does not belong to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the second TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the third TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not belong to the fourth TA change rate range.
第三方面,本申请提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由第二通信装置执行。第二通信装置可以包括网络设备或网络设备内部的芯片系统。例如,第二通信装置可以包括卫星装置或卫星装置内部的芯片(或芯片系统)。又例如,第二通信装置可以包括地面站或地面站内部的芯片(或芯片系统)。地面站例如可以包括部署于地面的网络设备(例如接入网设备))。Thirdly, this application provides a communication method that can be executed by a second communication device. The second communication device may include a network device or a chip system within the network device. For example, the second communication device may include a satellite device or a chip (or chip system) within the satellite device. As another example, the second communication device may include a ground station or a chip (or chip system) within the ground station. The ground station may, for example, include network equipment (e.g., access network equipment) deployed on the ground.
第二通信装置获取第四信息,第四信息用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域。第二通信装置在第四信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,向第一区域发送同步信号。第二通信装置向第一区域发送同步信号可以包括/为:第二通信装置开始向第一区域发送同步信号,或第二通信装置以第二时长(第二时长可以为一个较短的时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。The second communication device acquires fourth information, which is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the fourth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first area. Sending the synchronization signal to the first area may include: the second communication device starting to send the synchronization signal to the first area, or the second communication device periodically sending the synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration (which may be a shorter duration).
由于第二通信装置可以基于第四信息确定是否向第一区域发送同步信号,因此该方案可以使第二通信装置不必持续高频率的向第一区域发送同步信号,继而可以节省资源开销,减少通信系统的干扰,降低第二通信装置侧的方案复杂度。Since the second communication device can determine whether to send a synchronization signal to the first area based on the fourth information, this scheme can prevent the second communication device from continuously sending synchronization signals to the first area at a high frequency, thereby saving resource consumption, reducing interference in the communication system, and reducing the complexity of the scheme on the second communication device side.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置与第三通信装置建立RRC连接,终端装置与第二通信装置未建立RRC连接,终端装置与第一通信装置未建立RRC连接。相关内容和有益效果可以参见第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, but does not establish an RRC connection with the second communication device, nor with the first communication device. Related details and beneficial effects can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置在第一资源向终端装置发送第一数据,第一资源还用于第三通信装置向终端装置发送第二数据。相关内容和有益效果可以参见第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the second communication device transmits first data to the terminal device using the first resource, and the first resource is also used by the third communication device to transmit second data to the terminal device. Related details and beneficial effects can be found in the description of possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第四信息包括以下至少一项:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息;时间信息;与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息;与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息。第四信息中包括的上述各项内容可以参见前述第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the fourth information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information; information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the TA of the second communication device. The contents of the fourth information can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect above, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置在第四信息满足第一条件的情况下,向第一区域发送同步信号。第一条件相关内容和有益效果可以参见第一方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first region when the fourth information satisfies the first condition. The details and benefits of the first condition can be found in the description of the possible implementations of the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.
第四信息满足第一条件包括以下至少一项:第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围;第四信息中的时间信息指示的时间属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围。The fourth information satisfies the first condition including at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fourth information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置在第四信息不满足第一条件的情况下,确定第四信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域,可以不开始向第一区域发送同步信号,或者以第三时长(第三时长为一个较长的时长,例如第三时长大于第二时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。In another possible implementation, if the fourth information does not meet the first condition, the second communication device determines that the area where the fourth information indicates the second communication device to provide services does not include the first area. It may not start sending a synchronization signal to the first area, or it may periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area with a third duration (the third duration is a relatively long duration, for example, the third duration is longer than the second duration).
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置获取第五信息,第五信息用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域。第二通信装置在第五信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下,确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号。如此,可以节省资源开销。In one possible implementation, the second communication device acquires fifth information, which is used to determine the area where the second communication device provides services. If the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area, the second communication device determines to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area. This saves resource overhead.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置在第五信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,可以持续向第一区域发送同步信号,或以第二时长(第二时长可以为一个较短的时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。如此,可以延长为终端装置提供服务的时间,减少辅通信装置切换的频率,继而节省资源开销。In another possible implementation, if the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides service includes the first area, the second communication device can continuously send a synchronization signal to the first area, or periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration (which can be a shorter duration). This extends the service time for the terminal device, reduces the frequency of switching between auxiliary communication devices, and thus saves resource overhead.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置在第五信息不满足第一条件的情况下,确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号。第二通信装置在第五信息满足第一条件的情况下,可以持续向第一区域发送同步信号,或以第二时长(第二时长可以为一个较短的时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。In one possible implementation, if the fifth information does not meet the first condition, the second communication device determines to stop sending the synchronization signal to the first area. If the fifth information meets the first condition, the second communication device may continuously send the synchronization signal to the first area, or periodically send the synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (which may be a shorter duration).
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号之后,还包括以下至少一项:第二通信装置停止向第一区域发送同步信号;第二通信装置停止以第二时长为周期,周期性向第一区域发送同步信号;第二通信装置以第三时长为周期,周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,第三时长大于第二时长。如此,可以节省资源开销。In one possible implementation, after the second communication device determines to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area, it further includes at least one of the following: the second communication device stops sending synchronization signals to the first area; the second communication device stops periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration; the second communication device periodically sends synchronization signals to the first area with a third duration, the third duration being longer than the second duration. This can save resource consumption.
一种可能的实施方式中,第五信息包括以下至少一项:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息;时间信息(例如当前时间);与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息;与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息。第五信息中内容可以参见前述第一方面的可能的实施方式中的相关描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the fifth information includes at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device; time information (e.g., current time); information associated with the Doppler signal of the second communication device; and information associated with the TA of the second communication device. The contents of the fifth information can be found in the relevant descriptions of the possible implementations of the first aspect described above, and will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第五信息不满足第一条件包括以下至少一项:第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的仰角不属于第一仰角范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的轨道角度不属于第一轨道角度范围;第五信息中的时间信息指示的时间不属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒不属于第一多普勒范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率不属于第一多普勒率范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA不属于第一TA范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率不属于第一TA变化率范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率不属于第二TA变化率范围。In one possible implementation, the fifth information not satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fifth information is not within the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information is not within the second TA change rate range.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置接收第二配置信息。第二配置信息相关内容和有益效果可以参见第二方面的可能的实施方式的描述,不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the second communication device receives second configuration information. The details and benefits of the second configuration information can be found in the description of possible implementations in the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以为前述终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置。该通信装置可以包括通信单元和处理单元,以执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式。通信单元用于执行与发送和接收相关的功能。通信单元可以称为收发单元。可选地,通信单元包括接收单元和发送单元。在一种设计中,通信装置为通信芯片,处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器或处理器核心,通信单元可以为通信芯片的输入输出电路、输入输出接口或者天线端口。Fourthly, a communication device is provided, which can be the aforementioned terminal device, third communication device, or second communication device. The communication device may include a communication unit and a processing unit to perform any one of the first to third aspects, or any possible implementation of the first to third aspects. The communication unit is used to perform functions related to transmission and reception. The communication unit may be referred to as a transceiver unit. Optionally, the communication unit includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. In one design, the communication device is a communication chip, the processing unit may be one or more processors or processor cores, and the communication unit may be the input/output circuit, input/output interface, or antenna port of the communication chip.
在另一种设计中,通信单元可以为发射器和接收器,或者通信单元为发射机和接收机。In another design, the communication unit can be a transmitter and a receiver, or the communication unit can be a transmitter and a receiver.
可选的,通信装置还包括可用于执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式的各个模块。Optionally, the communication device may also include modules that can be used to perform any one of the first to third aspects described above, or to perform any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以为前述终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置。该通信装置可以包括处理器和存储器,以执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式。可选的,还包括收发器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序或指令,当处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令时,使得该通信装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式。Fifthly, a communication device is provided, which may be the aforementioned terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device. The communication device may include a processor and a memory to execute any one of the first to third aspects, or to execute any possible implementation of the first to third aspects. Optionally, it may also include a transceiver, the memory for storing computer programs or instructions, and the processor for retrieving and executing the computer programs or instructions from the memory. When the processor executes the computer programs or instructions in the memory, the communication device executes any one of the first to third aspects, or to execute any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
可选的,处理器为一个或多个,存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
可选的,存储器可以与处理器集成在一起,或者存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory can be integrated with the processor, or the memory can be set up separately from the processor.
可选的,收发器中可以包括,发射机(发射器)和接收机(接收器)。Optionally, the transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置可以为前述终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置。该通信装置可以包括处理器,以执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式。该处理器与存储器耦合。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, which may be the aforementioned terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device. The communication device may include a processor to execute any one of the first to third aspects, or to execute any possible implementation of the first to third aspects. The processor is coupled to a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置时,通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。In one implementation, when the communication device is a terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device, the communication interface can be a transceiver or an input/output interface. Optionally, the transceiver can be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface can be an input/output circuit.
在又一种实现方式中,当该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统时,通信接口可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。In another implementation, when the communication device is a chip or chip system, the communication interface can be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin, or related circuit on the chip or chip system. The processor can also be manifested as a processing circuit or logic circuit.
第七方面,提供了一种系统,系统包括上述终端装置。Seventhly, a system is provided, which includes the aforementioned terminal device.
一种可能的实现方式中,该系统还可以包括第三通信装置、第二通信装置和第一通信装置。In one possible implementation, the system may further include a third communication device, a second communication device, and a first communication device.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式。Eighthly, a computer program product is provided, comprising: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when executed, causes a computer to perform any one of the first to third aspects described above, or to perform any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或执行第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式。Ninth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided that stores a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform any one of the first to third aspects described above, or to perform any possible implementation of the first to third aspects.
第十方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括:接口电路和处理电路。接口电路可以包括输入电路和输出电路。处理电路用于通过输入电路接收信号,并通过输出电路发射信号,使得上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面,或第一方面至第三方面的任一种可能的实施方式被实现。A tenth aspect provides a processing apparatus, comprising: an interface circuit and a processing circuit. The interface circuit may include an input circuit and an output circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive signals through the input circuit and transmit signals through the output circuit, thereby enabling any one of the first to third aspects, or any possible implementation thereof, to be implemented.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理装置可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In specific implementation, the aforementioned processing device can be a chip, the input circuit can be an input pin, the output circuit can be an output pin, and the processing circuit can be a transistor, gate circuit, flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc. The input signal received by the input circuit can be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit can be, for example, but not limited to, output to a transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter. Furthermore, the input circuit and the output circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as the input circuit and output circuit at different times. This application does not limit the specific implementation method of the processor and various circuits.
在一种实现方式中,当通信装置是终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置。接口电路可以为终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置中的射频处理芯片,处理电路可以为终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置中的基带处理芯片。In one implementation, the communication device is a terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device. The interface circuit can be an RF processing chip in the terminal device, the third communication device, or the second communication device, and the processing circuit can be a baseband processing chip in the terminal device, the third communication device, or the second communication device.
在又一种实现方式中,通信装置可以是终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置中的部分器件,如系统芯片或通信芯片等集成电路产品。接口电路可以为该芯片或芯片系统上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理电路可以为该芯片上的逻辑电路。In another implementation, the communication device can be a component of a terminal device, a third communication device, or a second communication device, such as an integrated circuit product like a system-on-a-chip (SoC) or a communication chip. The interface circuit can be an input/output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pins, or related circuits on the chip or chip system. The processing circuit can be the logic circuit on the chip.
图1A为本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of this application;
图1B为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application;
图1C为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1C is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application;
图1D为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1D is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application;
图1E为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1E is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application;
图1F为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1F is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application;
图1G为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图;Figure 1G is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system applicable to the embodiments of this application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的可能的流程示意图;Figure 2 is a possible flowchart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例提供一种仰角的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of an elevation angle provided in an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种轨道角度的示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a track angle provided in an embodiment of this application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置对应的多普勒和多普勒变化率的示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of Doppler and Doppler rate of change corresponding to a communication device provided in an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的多个通信装置传输的信息的到达终端装置的示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of the arrival of information transmitted by multiple communication devices to a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种可能的终端装置获取数据的方法流程示意图;Figure 7 is a schematic flowchart of a possible method for a terminal device to acquire data according to an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的可能的流程示意图;Figure 8 is a possible flowchart of another communication method provided in an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一种结构示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of another structure of the communication device provided in an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一种结构示意图。Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of another structure of the communication device provided in the embodiment of this application.
下面对本申请实施例涉及到的术语和名词进行介绍。The terms and nouns used in the embodiments of this application are described below.
(1)资源。(1) Resources.
本申请实施例中的资源比如可以包括时域资源和/或频域资源。The resources in the embodiments of this application may include, for example, time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources.
(1.1)时域资源。(1.1) Time domain resources.
时域资源可以包括无线帧、子帧、时隙(slot)、微时隙(mini slot)或者符号(symbol)(例如,正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)、例如离散傅里叶变换(discrete fourier transform,DFT)扩展OFDM(DFT-spread OFDM,DFT-S-OFDM),正交化时频空域(orthogonal time frequency and space,OTFS)等)中的至少一项。Time-domain resources may include at least one of the following: radio frames, subframes, slots, mini slots, or symbols (e.g., orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM), such as discrete fourier transform (DFT) extended OFDM (DFT-spread OFDM, DFT-S-OFDM), orthogonal time-frequency and space (OTFS)).
一个时域单元可以包括一个无线帧、一个子帧、一个时隙(slot)、一个微时隙(mini slot)或者一个OFDM符号(symbol)。一个时域单元还可以包括由多个无线帧或多个子帧或多个时隙或多个微时隙或多个OFDM符号聚合组成的资源。其中,一个无线帧可以包括多个子帧,一个子帧可以包括一个或多个时隙,一个时隙可以包括至少一个符号。或者,一个无线帧可以包括多个时隙,一个时隙可以包括至少一个符号。需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,一个OFDM符号也可以简称为一个符号。A time-domain element may include a radio frame, a subframe, a slot, a mini slot, or an OFDM symbol. A time-domain element may also include resources aggregated from multiple radio frames, subframes, slots, mini slots, or OFDM symbols. Specifically, a radio frame may include multiple subframes, a subframe may include one or more slots, and a slot may include at least one symbol. Alternatively, a radio frame may include multiple slots, and a slot may include at least one symbol. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, an OFDM symbol may also be simply referred to as a symbol.
根据子载波间隔不同,每个符号长度可以不同,因此时隙长度可以不同。例如15kHz的子载波间隔对应的一个时隙的长度为0.5ms,60kHz的子载波间隔对应的一个时隙的长度为0.125ms,等等。Depending on the subcarrier spacing, the length of each symbol can vary, and therefore the time slot length can also vary. For example, a time slot with a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz has a length of 0.5 ms, a time slot with a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz has a length of 0.125 ms, and so on.
本申请实施例中,时域单元也可以替换为:时域资源单元或时域单元等。In this embodiment of the application, the time domain unit can also be replaced by: time domain resource unit or time domain unit, etc.
(1.2)频域资源。(1.2) Frequency domain resources.
在频域上,频域资源可以包括一个或多个频域单元。其中,一个频域单元可以是一个资源块(resource block,RB)、一个物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)、一个子载波(subcarrier)、一个资源块组(resource block group,RBG)、一个预定义的子带(subband)、一个预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)、资源池(resource pool)、一个带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)、一个资源元素(resource element,RE)(也可称资源单元或资源粒子)、一个载波、一个服务小区。其中,PRB和RB可以互相替换。可选的,资源池可以包括一个或多个资源,这些资源可以包括时域资源、频域资源、码域资源或空域资源中的至少一项。资源池中包括的资源数量和大小,可以是预定的或信令配置的。In the frequency domain, frequency domain resources can include one or more frequency domain units. A frequency domain unit can be a resource block (RB), a physical resource block (PRB), a subcarrier, a resource block group (RBG), a predefined subband, a precoding resource block group (PRG), a resource pool, a bandwidth part (BWP), a resource element (RE) (also called a resource unit or resource particle), a carrier, or a serving cell. PRBs and RBs can be interchanged. Optionally, a resource pool can include one or more resources, which can include at least one of time-domain resources, frequency-domain resources, code-domain resources, or spatial-domain resources. The number and size of resources included in the resource pool can be predetermined or configured by signaling.
子载波或RE都是指的多载波系统中,在特定的符号上的一个最小的频域单元。子载波间隔(sub-carrier spacing,SCS)是OFDM系统中,频域上相邻的两个子载波的中心位置或峰值位置之间的间隔值。在5G NR中,引入了多种子载波间隔,不同的载波可以有不同的子载波间隔。基线为15kHz,可以是15kHz×2n,n是整数,从3.75、7.5直到480kHz。本申请实施例中RE可以是指时频资源的资源单位,比如可以视为最小的时频资源单位。在本申请中,子载波和RE可以互用,其内含相同。Subcarrier or RE refers to the smallest frequency domain unit on a specific symbol in a multicarrier system. Subcarrier spacing (SCS) is the interval between the center or peak positions of two adjacent subcarriers in the frequency domain in an OFDM system. In 5G NR, various subcarrier spacings are introduced, and different carriers can have different subcarrier spacings. The baseline is 15kHz, which can be 15kHz × 2n, where n is an integer from 3.75, 7.5 up to 480kHz. In the embodiments of this application, RE can refer to a resource unit of time-frequency resources, for example, it can be considered as the smallest time-frequency resource unit. In this application, subcarrier and RE are interchangeable and have the same content.
子信道,是物理侧行共享信道占用频域资源的最小单位,一个子信道可以包括一个或多个资源块(resource block,RB)。无线通信系统在频域上的带宽可以包括多个RB,例如,在LTE系统的各可能的带宽中,包括的物理资源块(physical resource block,PRB)可以为6个、15个、25个、50个等。在频域上,一个RB可以包括若干个子载波,例如,在LTE系统中,一个RB包括12个子载波,其中,每个子载波间隔可以为15kHz,当然,也可以采用其他子载波间隔,例如3.75kHz、30kHz、60kHz或120kHz子载波间隔,在此不作限制。A subchannel is the smallest unit of frequency domain resources occupied by a physical cross-channel shared channel. A subchannel can include one or more resource blocks (RBs). The bandwidth of a wireless communication system in the frequency domain can include multiple RBs. For example, in the various possible bandwidths of an LTE system, the number of physical resource blocks (PRBs) included can be 6, 15, 25, 50, etc. In the frequency domain, an RB can include several subcarriers. For example, in an LTE system, an RB includes 12 subcarriers, where the spacing between each subcarrier can be 15kHz. Of course, other subcarrier spacings can also be used, such as 3.75kHz, 30kHz, 60kHz, or 120kHz subcarrier spacings, which are not limited here.
一个频域单元可以包括一个RE、一个RB、一个信道、一个子信道(sub channel)、一个载波(carrier),或一个部分带宽(BWP,bandwidth part)等。一个频域单元还可以包括由多个RE或多个RB或多个子信道或多个载波或多个BWP聚合组成的资源。本申请实施例中,信道可以等价替换为资源块集(resource block set,RB set),一个RB set的频域带宽可以是20兆赫兹(mega hertz,MHz)。A frequency domain unit may include a RE, an RB, a channel, a subchannel, a carrier, or a bandwidth part (BWP). A frequency domain unit may also include resources aggregated from multiple REs, multiple RBs, multiple subchannels, multiple carriers, or multiple BWPs. In the embodiments of this application, a channel can be equivalently replaced by a resource block set (RB set), and the frequency domain bandwidth of an RB set can be 20 MHz.
本申请实施例中,频域单元也可以替换为:频域资源单元或频率单元等。In this embodiment, the frequency domain unit can also be replaced by: frequency domain resource unit or frequency unit, etc.
一个频域资源集可以包括一个或多个频域单元。频域资源集也可以称为频域资源集合、频域资源组等。一个频域资源集例如可以包括资源块集(resource block set,RBset)、一个RB、一个子信道、一个资源池、一个载波、一个BWP。A frequency domain resource set may include one or more frequency domain elements. A frequency domain resource set may also be called a frequency domain resource collection, frequency domain resource group, etc. For example, a frequency domain resource set may include a resource block set (RBset), an RB, a subchannel, a resource pool, a carrier, and a BWP.
(2)参考信号。(2) Reference signal.
本申请实施例中的参考信号可以包括定位参考信号(positioning reference signal,PRS)、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)、相位跟踪参考信号(phase-tracking reference signals,PTRS),或同步信号-物理层侧行广播信道块(synchronization signal and physical sidelink broadcast channel block,SSB)中的至少一项。The reference signal in the embodiments of this application may include at least one of the following: positioning reference signal (PRS), sounding reference signal (SRS), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signal (DMRS), phase-tracking reference signals (PTRS), or synchronization signal and physical sidelink broadcast channel block (SSB).
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:地面通信系统,NTN通信系统,例如卫星通信系统。其中,卫星通信系统可以与移动通信系统相融合。例如:移动通信系统可以为第四代(4th Generation,4G)通信系统(例如,长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统),全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统,第五代(5th Generation,5G)通信系统(例如,新无线(new radio,NR)系统),及未来的移动通信系统等。移动通信系统还可以为车到万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)系统,物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统。The technical solutions of this application embodiment can be applied to various communication systems, such as terrestrial communication systems, NTN communication systems, and satellite communication systems. Satellite communication systems can be integrated with mobile communication systems. For example, mobile communication systems can be 4th Generation (4G) communication systems (e.g., Long Term Evolution (LTE) systems), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication systems, 5th Generation (5G) communication systems (e.g., New Radio (NR) systems), and future mobile communication systems. Mobile communication systems can also be vehicle-to-everything (V2X) systems and Internet of Things (IoT) systems.
(3)区域。(3) Region.
区域(例如本申请实施例涉及到的第一区域):除特殊说明外,本申请下述实施例中的“区域”均指地理区域。区域相对于地球固定,或者理解为区域指相对地球固定的地理区域。示例性的,区域可以具有以下至少一项属性:形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积、地理位置等。Region (e.g., the first region involved in the embodiments of this application): Unless otherwise specified, "region" in the following embodiments of this application refers to a geographical region. A region is fixed relative to the Earth, or it can be understood as a geographical region that is fixed relative to the Earth. For example, a region may have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographical location, etc.
“区域”还可以具有高度属性,即区域可以理解为某个给定高度或高度范围的地理区域。默认情况下,区域可以指地面上海拔高度为0千米(km)或海拔高度在0km左右(如[-2,2]km范围内)的地理区域,或者指某一平均海拔高度的地理区域。此外,也可以指其他特定高度或特定高度范围的地理区域,例如海拔高度为10km的地理区域,或海拔高度在10km左右(如[7,13]km范围内)的地理区域。The term "region" can also have an altitude attribute, meaning a region can be understood as a geographical area at a given altitude or altitude range. By default, a region can refer to a geographical area on the ground with an altitude of 0 kilometers (km) or an altitude around 0 km (e.g., within the range of [-2, 2] km), or a geographical area with a certain average altitude. Additionally, it can refer to geographical areas at other specific altitudes or altitude ranges, such as a geographical area with an altitude of 10 km, or a geographical area with an altitude around 10 km (e.g., within the range of [7, 13] km).
在一种可能的实施方式中,上述相对于地球固定的区域也可以称为“波位”、“地理区域”等。当然,还可以有其他名称,本申请对相对于地球固定的区域的名称不作具体限定。In one possible implementation, the aforementioned region fixed relative to the Earth can also be referred to as a "wave position," "geographical region," etc. Of course, other names are also possible, and this application does not specifically limit the name of the region fixed relative to the Earth.
不同区域的形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积可以相同也可以不相同。不同区域的地理位置不同。不同区域之间可以存在重叠也可以不存在重叠。Different regions may have the same or different shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas. Different regions may be geographically different. Different regions may or may not overlap.
在一种可能的实施方式中,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不变,例如区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不随时间的变化而变化。或者,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域轮廓以及区域中的点可以通过地球固定坐标系描述,或区域轮廓上的各个点在地球固定坐标系中的坐标固定不变。In one possible implementation, "region fixed relative to the Earth" can be understood as follows: the region's outline, size, or geographical location remains unchanged; for example, the region's outline, size, or geographical location does not change over time. Alternatively, "region fixed relative to the Earth" can be understood as follows: the region's outline and the points within it can be described using a fixed Earth coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the region's outline in the fixed Earth coordinate system remain constant.
在一种可能的实施方式中,区域的形状可以为正六边形,或者为其他形状如正五边形、圆形、椭圆形等。或者,区域的形状还可以为不规则形状,不予限制。In one possible implementation, the shape of the region can be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc. Alternatively, the shape of the region can also be irregular, without limitation.
示例性的,区域的形状可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域形状可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域形状。类似的,区域的大小、半径、面积也可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域大小、半径、面积可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域大小、多种区域半径、或多种区域面积。For example, the shape of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different shapes. The same network device can also define multiple region shapes. Similarly, the size, radius, and area of a region can also be defined by a protocol or by a network device. Regions defined by different network devices can have the same or different sizes, radii, or areas. The same network device can also define multiple region sizes, multiple region radii, or multiple region areas.
在一种可能的实施方式中,可以将地球表面划分为多个区域,并对多个区域进行索引(如编号)。终端设备和网络设备可以约定对这些区域的编号方式(如从1开始编号还是从0开始编号)以及区域与索引的对应关系。或者协议可以定义对这些区域的编号方式以及区域与索引的对应关系。基于区域的索引,可以确定区域的地理位置等信息。In one possible implementation, the Earth's surface can be divided into multiple regions, and these regions can be indexed (e.g., numbered). Terminal devices and network devices can agree on the numbering method for these regions (e.g., starting from 1 or 0) and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Alternatively, the protocol can define the numbering method for these regions and the correspondence between regions and indexes. Based on the region indexes, information such as the region's geographical location can be determined.
可选的,划分的多个区域可以完全覆盖地球表面,如地球表面上的任意位置均属于某个区域;或者,划分的多个区域也可以覆盖地球上的部分地理位置,例如,该多个区域可以不覆盖地球南极和/或北极,即南极和/或北极可以不存在该区域。Optionally, the multiple regions can completely cover the Earth's surface, such that any location on the Earth's surface belongs to a certain region; or, the multiple regions can also cover part of the geographical location on Earth, for example, the multiple regions may not cover the Earth's South Pole and/or North Pole, that is, the South Pole and/or North Pole may not exist in the region.
可选的,划分多个区域的方式可以由协议定义,或者可以由网络设备定义。不同网络设备定义的划分方式可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种划分方式。Optionally, the method of dividing the network into multiple zones can be defined by a protocol or by the network device. Different network devices can define the same or different division methods. The same network device can also define multiple division methods.
作为第一种可能的划分方式,可以使用一种粒度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,例如,可以以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分地球表面。若仅采用该离散方式,则全球可以划分为360×360=129600个区域,终端设备和网络设备可以将该129600个区域的索引约定为0,1,…,129599,或者也可以约定为1,2,…,129600。As a first possible method of partitioning, the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity, for example, a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree. If only this discretization method is used, the globe can be divided into 360×360=129600 regions. Terminal devices and network devices can define the indexes of these 129600 regions as 0,1,…,129599, or they can also define them as 1,2,…,129600.
可选的,当引入地理区域的高度属性后,可定义多张网格划分地球表面,例如海拔高度0千米(kilometre,km)处或海拔高度在[-2,2]km范围内的网格可以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,产生129600个区域。海拔高度10km处或海拔高度在[7,13]km范围内,再以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分,又产生129600个区域。在对这些区域进行索引时,需对索引范围进行扩展,例如总索引为0,1,…,129599,129600,129601,…,259199,其中前129600个序号表示海拔高度为0km或海拔高度在[-2,2]km范围内的区域索引,后129600个序号表示海拔高度为10km或海拔高度在[7,13]km范围内的区域索引。Optionally, when introducing the altitude attribute of a geographic region, multiple grids can be defined to divide the Earth's surface. For example, a grid at an altitude of 0 km or within the range of [-2, 2] km can be divided into 1-degree latitude and longitude grids, generating 129,600 regions. At an altitude of 10 km or within the range of [7, 13] km, further division using 1-degree latitude and longitude grids generates another 129,600 regions. When indexing these regions, the index range needs to be expanded. For example, the total index could be 0, 1, ..., 129,599, 129,600, 129,601, ..., 259,199, where the first 129,600 indices represent the region index at an altitude of 0 km or within the range of [-2, 2] km, and the last 129,600 indices represent the region index at an altitude of 10 km or within the range of [7, 13] km.
示例性的,经纬度网格的粒度可以根据网络设备的类型确定。例如,在网络设备为LEO卫星的情况下,可以采用相对较小的颗粒度进行离散;在网络设备为地球静止轨道(geosynchronous earth orbit,GEO)卫星的情况下,可以采用相对较大的颗粒度进行离散。For example, the granularity of the latitude and longitude grid can be determined based on the type of network device. For instance, a relatively small granularity can be used for discretization when the network device is a LEO satellite, and a relatively large granularity can be used when the network device is a geosynchronous orbit (GEO) satellite.
作为第二种可能的划分方式,可以使用多种粒度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,例如,在地球的一部分表面或部分行政区域内以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格进行划分,在另一部分表面或行政区域内以颗粒度为2度的经纬度网络进行划分。As a second possible method of division, the Earth's surface can be divided using latitude and longitude grids of various granularities. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a portion of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees.
或者,在引入地理区域的高度属性后,海拔高度为0km处可以以颗粒度为1度的经纬度网格划分地球表面,海拔高度为10km处可以以颗粒度为2度的经纬度网格划分地球表面。Alternatively, by introducing the altitude attribute of a geographic region, the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1 degree at an altitude of 0 km, and the Earth's surface can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 2 degrees at an altitude of 10 km.
作为第三种可能的划分方式,可以以行政区域划分地球表面。例如,将一个乡级行政区域作为一个区域。As a third possible method of division, the Earth's surface can be divided by administrative regions. For example, a township-level administrative region could be considered as a region.
作为第四种可能的划分方式,对于GEO卫星,可以将GEO卫星的一个波束在地面的投影作为一个区域。由于GEO卫星相对于地球静止,因此,可以认为GEO卫星的波束在地面的投影相对于地球固定。As a fourth possible division method, for GEO satellites, the projection of one of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered as a region. Since GEO satellites are stationary relative to the Earth, the projection of the GEO satellite's beams onto the ground can be considered fixed relative to the Earth.
在实际应用中,可以结合多种划分方式对地球表面进行划分,例如,在地球的一部分表面或部分行政区域内以颗粒度为1的经纬度网格进行划分,在另一部分表面或行政区域内按照行政区域进行划分。In practical applications, the Earth's surface can be divided using a combination of different methods. For example, a portion of the Earth's surface or a part of its administrative region can be divided using a latitude and longitude grid with a granularity of 1, while another portion of the surface or administrative region can be divided according to its administrative region.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在将地球表面划分为多个区域的情况下,可以对同一地表范围进行不同层级的区域划分。示例性的,对于某个地表范围,可以以颗粒度为10度的经纬度网格进行第一层级的区域划分,以颗粒度为6的经纬度网络进行第二层级的区域划分,以颗粒度为1的经纬度网格进行第三层级的区域划分。此时,该地表范围内,第一层级的区域数目大于第二层级的区域数目,第二层级的区域数目大于第三层级的区域数目。此外,该场景下,每一层级的区域可以单独进行编号。In one possible implementation, when the Earth's surface is divided into multiple regions, different levels of region division can be applied to the same surface area. For example, for a given surface area, a first level of region division can be performed using a 10-degree granularity latitude and longitude grid, a second level using a 6-degree granularity grid, and a third level using a 1-degree granularity grid. In this case, within the surface area, the number of regions at the first level is greater than the number at the second level, and the number of regions at the second level is greater than the number at the third level. Furthermore, in this scenario, each level of region can be individually numbered.
图1A示例性示出了本申请实施例适用的一种通信系统1000的架构示意图。如图1A所示,该通信系统包括无线接入网100和核心网200,可选的,通信系统1000还可以包括互联网300。其中,无线接入网100可以包括至少一个无线接入网设备(如图1A中的110a和110b),还可以包括至少一个终端设备(如图1A中的120a-120j)。终端设备通过无线的方式与无线接入网设备相连,无线接入网设备通过无线或有线方式与核心网连接。核心网设备与无线接入网设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备,也可以是将核心网设备的功能与无线接入网设备的逻辑功能集成在同一个物理设备上,还可以是一个物理设备上集成了部分核心网设备的功能和部分的无线接入网设备的功能。终端设备和终端设备之间以及无线接入网设备和无线接入网设备之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互连接。图1A只是示意图,该通信系统中还可以包括其它网络设备,如还可以包括无线中继设备和无线回传设备,在图1A中未画出。Figure 1A exemplarily illustrates an architecture diagram of a communication system 1000 applicable to an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 1A, the communication system includes a wireless access network 100 and a core network 200. Optionally, the communication system 1000 may also include an Internet 300. The wireless access network 100 may include at least one wireless access network device (110a and 110b in Figure 1A) and at least one terminal device (120a-120j in Figure 1A). The terminal device is wirelessly connected to the wireless access network device, and the wireless access network device is wirelessly or wiredly connected to the core network. The core network device and the wireless access network device may be independent and different physical devices, or the functions of the core network device and the logical functions of the wireless access network device may be integrated on the same physical device, or a single physical device may integrate some of the functions of the core network device and some of the functions of the wireless access network device. Terminal devices and wireless access network devices may be interconnected via wired or wireless means. Figure 1A is just a schematic diagram. The communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices and wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in Figure 1A.
本申请实施例中所涉及的网络设备,例如包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备。无线接入网设备可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、发送节点(transmission point,TP),第五代(5th generation,5G)移动通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、未来移动通信系统中的基站或WiFi系统中的接入节点等;也可以是完成基站部分功能的模块或单元,例如,可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),也可以是分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),还可以是无线单元(radio unit,RU)。这里的CU完成基站的无线资源控制协议和分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)的功能,还可以完成业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)的功能;DU完成基站的无线链路控制层和介质访问控制(medium access control,MAC)层的功能,还可以完成部分物理层或全部物理层的功能,有关上述各个协议层的具体描述,可以参考第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)的相关技术规范。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。在不同系统中,CU、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在开放式无线接入网(open radio access network,ORAN)系统中,CU也可以称为开放式CU(open-CU,O-CU),DU也可以称为开放式DU(open-DU,O-DU),RU也可以称为开放式RU(open-RU,O-RU)。本申请中的CU(或CU控制面(CU control plane,CU-CP)、CU用户面(CU user plane,CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。CU-CP也可以称为开放式CU-CP(open-CU-CP,O-CU-CP),CU-UP也可以称为开放式CU-UP(open-CU-UP,O-CU-UP)。The network devices involved in the embodiments of this application include, for example, radio access network (RAN) devices. RAN devices can be base stations, evolved NodeBs (eNodeBs), transmission reception points (TRPs), transmission points (TPs), next-generation NodeBs (gNBs) in 5G mobile communication systems, base stations in future mobile communication systems, or access nodes in WiFi systems; they can also be modules or units that perform some of the functions of a base station, for example, they can be central units (CUs), distributed units (DUs), or radio units (RUs). The CU (Radio Control Unit) performs the functions of the Radio Resource Control Protocol (RRC) and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) of the base station, and can also perform the functions of the Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP). The DU (Radio Access Unit) performs the functions of the Radio Link Control (RANC) and Medium Access Control (MAC) layers of the base station, and can also perform some or all of the physical layer functions. For specific descriptions of the above protocol layers, please refer to the relevant technical specifications of the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The CU and DU can be set up separately or included in the same network element, such as in the baseband unit (BBU). The RU (Radio Receiver Unit) can be included in radio frequency equipment or radio frequency units, such as in the remote radio unit (RRU), active antenna unit (AAU), or remote radio head (RRH). In different systems, CU, DU, or RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meanings. For example, in an open radio access network (ORAN) system, CU can also be called open CU (open-CU, O-CU), DU can also be called open DU (open-DU, O-DU), and RU can also be called open RU (open-RU, O-RU). In this application, any unit among CU (or CU control plane (CU-CP), CU user plane (CU-UP), DU, and RU) can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software and hardware modules. CU-CP can also be called open CU-CP (open-CU-CP, O-CU-CP), and CU-UP can also be called open CU-UP (open-CU-UP, O-CU-UP).
图1B示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种O-RAN系统架构示意图。本申请提供的实施例中O-RAN系统可以包括图1B中所示的组件之外的其他组件。如图1B所示,接入网设备(RAN,例如可以是eNB或gNB或下一代接入网设备)通过回传链路(Backhaul)与核心网(core network,CN)通信,通过空口与用户设备(user equipment,UE)通信。例如,接入网设备中的基带单元(Baseband Unit,BBU)通过回传链路(Backhaul)与核心网通信,接入网设备中的射频单元(Radio Unit,RU)通过空口与至少一个UE通信。BBU通过前传链路与至少一个RU通信,BBU和RU可以是共址的,也可以不是共址的。BBU包括至少一个控制单元(Control Unit,CU)和至少一个分布式单元(Distributed Unit,DU),它们可以通过至少一个中传链路(Midhaul)进行通信。本申请实施例中第三通信装置可以向终端装置(例如UE)配置辅通信装置的信息,还可以向终端装置发送用于激活或去激活一个或多个通信装置的信令等,这些信令的发送可以由第三通信装置中的CU和/或DU向终端装置发送。Figure 1B illustrates an exemplary O-RAN system architecture provided by an embodiment of this application. The O-RAN system in the embodiments provided by this application may include components other than those shown in Figure 1B. As shown in Figure 1B, the access network device (RAN, for example, an eNB, gNB, or next-generation access network device) communicates with the core network (CN) via a backhaul link and with the user equipment (UE) via an air interface. For example, the baseband unit (BBU) in the access network device communicates with the core network via a backhaul link, and the radio unit (RU) in the access network device communicates with at least one UE via an air interface. The BBU communicates with at least one RU via a fronthaul link; the BBU and RU may or may not be co-located. The BBU includes at least one control unit (CU) and at least one distributed unit (DU), which can communicate via at least one midhaul link. In the embodiments of this application, the third communication device can configure information of the auxiliary communication device to the terminal device (e.g., UE), and can also send signaling to the terminal device for activating or deactivating one or more communication devices. The sending of these signaling messages can be sent to the terminal device by the CU and/or DU in the third communication device.
图1C示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种O-RAN系统架构示意图。如图1C所示,O-RAN可以包括O-CU-CP、O-CU-UP、O-DU以及O-RU。该系统架构还可以包括开放式云(O-cloud)、服务管理以及编配架构(service management and orchestration framework)、开放式eNB(open eNB,O-eNB)以及近(near)-实时(real time,RT)无线接入网智能控制接入器(RAN Intelligent Controller,RIC)和非(non)-实时(real time)RIC。非(non)-RT RIC可以实现对多个O-CU-CP、O-CU-UP、DU或O-eNB中的至少一项的无线资源的监控、配置、管理和控制。如图1C所示,3GPP定义的接口例如包括:E1,F1(例如F1-c、F1-u),NG(例如NG-c、NG-u),Xn(例如Xn-c、Xn-u),X2(例如X2-c、X2-u)。例如,O-RAN通信系统还包括一些接口,例如O1,O2,E2,A1,开放式(Open)-前传(front hual,FH)(例如开放式-FH控制(M)-面(plane),又例如开放式-FH控制、用户和同步(control,user and synchronization,CUS)-面(plane))等接口。图1C中示出的各个接口的名称以及各个单元的连接方式为一种示例,实际应用中,O-RAN系统可以包括更多或更少的接口,或包括更多或更少的单元。Figure 1C exemplarily illustrates a schematic diagram of an O-RAN system architecture provided in an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 1C, O-RAN may include O-CU-CP, O-CU-UP, O-DU, and O-RU. The system architecture may also include an open cloud (O-cloud), a service management and orchestration framework, an open eNB (O-eNB), a near-real-time (RT) RAN Intelligent Controller (RIC), and a non-real-time RIC. The non-RT RIC can monitor, configure, manage, and control radio resources of at least one of multiple O-CU-CP, O-CU-UP, DU, or O-eNB. As shown in Figure 1C, the interfaces defined by 3GPP include, for example, E1, F1 (e.g., F1-c, F1-u), NG (e.g., NG-c, NG-u), Xn (e.g., Xn-c, Xn-u), and X2 (e.g., X2-c, X2-u). For example, the O-RAN communication system also includes interfaces such as O1, O2, E2, A1, and Open Fronthaul (FH) interfaces (e.g., Open-FH Control (M)-plane, and Open-FH Control, User, and Synchronization (CUS)-plane). The names of the interfaces and the connection methods of the units shown in Figure 1C are just examples. In practical applications, the O-RAN system may include more or fewer interfaces, or more or fewer units.
无线接入网设备可以是宏基站(如图1A中的110a),也可以是微基站或室内站(如图1A中的110b),还可以是中继节点或施主节点等。本申请的实施例对无线接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。为了便于描述,下文以基站作为无线接入网设备的例子进行描述。Wireless access network equipment can be a macro base station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110a), a micro base station or an indoor station (as shown in Figure 1A, 110b), or a relay node or donor node, etc. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology or equipment form used in the wireless access network equipment. For ease of description, a base station is used as an example of wireless access network equipment in the following description.
终端设备也可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端设备等。终端设备可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备,传感器等。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。Terminal devices can also be referred to as user equipment (UE), mobile stations, mobile terminal devices, etc. Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grids, smart furniture, smart offices, smart wearables, smart transportation, smart cities, etc. Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, sensors, etc. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technologies or device forms used in the terminal devices.
上述终端设备可通过运营商网络提供的接口(例如N1等)与运营商网络建立连接,使用运营商网络提供的数据和/或语音等服务。终端设备还可通过运营商网络访问域名系统(domain name system,DNS),使用DNS上部署的运营商业务,和/或第三方提供的业务。其中,上述第三方可为运营商网络和终端设备之外的服务方,可为终端设备提供他数据和/或语音等服务。其中,上述第三方的具体表现形式,具体可根据实际应用场景确定,在此不做限制。The aforementioned terminal devices can establish connections with the operator's network through interfaces provided by the operator's network (such as N1), and use data and/or voice services provided by the operator's network. The terminal devices can also access the Domain Name System (DNS) through the operator's network, and use operator services deployed on the DNS, and/or services provided by third parties. These third parties can be service providers outside of the operator's network and the terminal devices, and can provide other data and/or voice services to the terminal devices. The specific form of these third parties can be determined based on the actual application scenario and is not limited here.
终端设备也可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、移动终端设备等。终端设备可以广泛应用于各种场景,例如,设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)、车物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信、机器类通信(machine-type communication,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IOT)、虚拟现实、增强现实、工业控制、自动驾驶、远程医疗、智能电网、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通、智慧城市等。终端设备可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备、路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)等。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。Terminal devices can also be referred to as user equipment (UE), mobile stations, mobile terminal devices, etc. Terminal devices can be widely used in various scenarios, such as device-to-device (D2D), vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, machine-type communication (MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality, augmented reality, industrial control, autonomous driving, telemedicine, smart grids, smart furniture, smart offices, smart wearables, smart transportation, smart cities, etc. Terminal devices can be mobile phones, tablets, computers with wireless transceiver capabilities, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, roadside units (RSUs), etc. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technologies or device forms used in the terminal devices.
基站和终端设备可以是固定位置的,也可以是可移动的。基站和终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上;还可以部署在空中的飞机、气球和人造卫星上。本申请的实施例对基站和终端设备的应用场景不做限定。Base stations and terminal equipment can be fixed or mobile. They can be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; on water; or in the air on aircraft, balloons, and satellites. The embodiments of this application do not limit the application scenarios of the base stations and terminal equipment.
基站和终端设备的角色可以是相对的,例如,图1A中的直升机或无人机120i可以被配置成移动基站,对于那些通过120i接入到无线接入网100的终端设备120j来说,终端设备120i是基站;但对于基站110a来说,120i是终端设备,即110a与120i之间是通过无线空口协议进行通信的。当然,110a与120i之间也可以是通过基站与基站之间的接口协议进行通信的,此时,相对于110a来说,120i也是基站。因此,基站和终端设备都可以统一称为通信装置,图1A中的110a和110b可以称为具有基站功能的通信装置,图1A中的120a-120j可以称为具有终端设备功能的通信装置。The roles of base stations and terminal devices can be relative. For example, the helicopter or drone 120i in Figure 1A can be configured as a mobile base station. For terminal devices 120j that access the wireless access network 100 through 120i, terminal device 120i is a base station; however, for base station 110a, 120i is a terminal device, meaning that 110a and 120i communicate via a wireless air interface protocol. Of course, 110a and 120i can also communicate via a base station-to-base station interface protocol. In this case, relative to 110a, 120i is also a base station. Therefore, both base stations and terminal devices can be collectively referred to as communication devices. 110a and 110b in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with base station functions, and 120a-120j in Figure 1A can be called communication devices with terminal device functions.
基站和终端设备之间、基站和基站之间、终端设备和终端设备之间可以通过授权频谱进行通信,也可以通过免授权频谱进行通信,也可以同时通过授权频谱和免授权频谱进行通信;可以通过6千兆赫(gigahertz,GHz)以下的频谱进行通信,也可以通过6GHz以上的频谱进行通信,还可以同时使用6GHz以下的频谱和6GHz以上的频谱进行通信。本申请的实施例对无线通信所使用的频谱资源不做限定。Communication between base stations and terminal devices, between base stations, and between terminal devices can be conducted using licensed spectrum, unlicensed spectrum, or both simultaneously. Communication can be conducted using spectrum below 6 GHz, spectrum above 6 GHz, or both simultaneously. The embodiments of this application do not limit the spectrum resources used for wireless communication.
在本申请的实施例中,基站的功能也可以由基站中的模块(如芯片)来执行,也可以由包含有基站功能的控制子系统来执行。这里的包含有基站功能的控制子系统可以是智能电网、工业控制、智能交通、智慧城市等上述应用场景中的控制中心。终端设备的功能也可以由终端设备中的模块(如芯片或调制解调器)来执行,也可以由包含有终端设备功能的装置来执行。In the embodiments of this application, the functions of the base station can be executed by modules (such as chips) within the base station, or by a control subsystem that includes base station functions. This control subsystem, including base station functions, can be a control center in the aforementioned application scenarios such as smart grids, industrial control, intelligent transportation, and smart cities. Similarly, the functions of the terminal device can be executed by modules (such as chips or modems) within the terminal device, or by a device that includes terminal device functions.
在本申请中,基站向终端设备发送下行信号或下行信息,下行信息承载在下行信道上;终端设备向基站发送上行信号或上行信息,上行信息承载在上行信道上。终端设备为了与基站进行通信,需要与基站控制的小区建立无线连接。与终端设备建立了无线连接的小区称为该终端设备的服务小区。当终端设备与该服务小区进行通信的时候,还会受到来自邻区的信号的干扰。In this application, the base station sends downlink signals or downlink information to the terminal device, with the downlink information carried on the downlink channel; the terminal device sends uplink signals or uplink information to the base station, with the uplink information carried on the uplink channel. In order to communicate with the base station, the terminal device needs to establish a radio connection with a cell controlled by the base station. The cell with which the terminal device has established a radio connection is called the serving cell of the terminal device. When the terminal device communicates with this serving cell, it is also subject to interference from signals from neighboring cells.
本申请实施例中所涉及的核心网,可以包括对用户的信令和数据进行处理和转发的网络设备。例如包括接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)以及用户面网关、定位管理设备等核心网设备。其中用户面网关可以是具有对用户面数据进行移动性管理、路由、转发等功能的服务器,一般位于网络侧,如服务网关(serving gateway,SGW)或分组数据网络网关(packet data network gateway,PGW)或用户面网元功能实体(user plane function,UPF)等。AMF以及SMF相当于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中的移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)。AMF主要负责准入方面,SMF主要负责会话管理。当然,核心网中也可以包括其他网元,这里不一一列举。The core network involved in this application embodiment may include network devices that process and forward user signaling and data. For example, it includes core network devices such as access and mobility management functions (AMF), session management functions (SMF), user plane gateways, and location management devices. The user plane gateway can be a server with functions such as mobility management, routing, and forwarding of user plane data, generally located on the network side, such as a serving gateway (SGW), packet data network gateway (PGW), or user plane function (UPF). AMF and SMF are equivalent to the mobility management entity (MME) in a long-term evolution (LTE) system. AMF is mainly responsible for admission aspects, and SMF is mainly responsible for session management. Of course, the core network may also include other network elements, which are not listed here.
图1A只是示意图,该无线通信系统中还可以包括其它设备,如还可以包括核心网设备、无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备等,在图1A中未画出。Figure 1A is only a schematic diagram. The wireless communication system may also include other devices, such as core network devices, wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices, which are not shown in Figure 1A.
图1D和图1E示例性示出了本申请实施例适用的几种通信系统的网络架构示意图。该通信系统可以包括卫星、网络设备和终端设备等。该通信系统还可以包括网关和核心网设备。图1D和图1E示例性示出了NTN与地面网络的融合网络架构。下面结合附图进行介绍。Figures 1D and 1E exemplarily illustrate network architecture diagrams of several communication systems applicable to embodiments of this application. The communication system may include satellites, network devices, and terminal devices, etc. The communication system may also include gateways and core network devices. Figures 1D and 1E exemplarily illustrate a converged network architecture of NTN and terrestrial networks. A description is provided below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
卫星可以是高椭圆轨道(highly elliptical orbiting,HEO)卫星、GEO卫星、中轨(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星和低轨(low-earth orbit,LEO)卫星。本申请实施例对卫星的工作模式不作限制,例如,卫星的工作模式可以是透传(transparent)模式,也可以是再生(regenerative)模式。图1D是以卫星的工作模式为透传模式为例进行示意的,图1E是以卫星的工作模式为再生模式为例进行示意的。The satellite can be a highly elliptical orbit (HEO) satellite, a GEO satellite, a medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite, or a low earth orbit (LEO) satellite. This application does not limit the satellite's operating mode; for example, the satellite can operate in transparent mode or regenerative mode. Figure 1D illustrates the satellite operating in transparent mode, and Figure 1E illustrates the satellite operating in regenerative mode.
卫星工作在透传(transparent)模式时,卫星具有中继的透明转发的功能。网关具有网络设备(比如基站)的功能或部分网络设备(比如基站)功能,此时可以将网关看做是网络设备(比如基站)。或者,网络设备(比如基站)可以与网关分开部署,那么馈电链路的时延就包括卫星到网关以及网关到gNB的时延两部分。后面讨论的透传模式是以网关和gNB在一起或位置相近的情况为例,对于网关与gNB相距较远的情况,馈电链路时延将卫星到网关和网关到gNB的时延相加即可。When a satellite operates in transparent mode, it provides transparent relay forwarding functionality. A gateway possesses the functions of a network device (such as a base station) or some of the functions of a network device (such as a base station); in this case, the gateway can be considered a network device (such as a base station). Alternatively, the network device (such as a base station) can be deployed separately from the gateway. In this case, the feeder link latency includes both the latency from the satellite to the gateway and the latency from the gateway to the gNB. The transparent mode discussed later assumes that the gateway and gNB are located together or close to each other. For cases where the gateway and gNB are far apart, the feeder link latency is simply the sum of the latency from the satellite to the gateway and the latency from the gateway to the gNB.
当卫星工作在再生(regenerative)模式时,卫星具有数据处理能力、具有网络设备(比如基站)的功能或部分网络设备(比如基站)功能,此时可以将卫星看做是网络设备(比如基站)。When a satellite is operating in regenerative mode, it has data processing capabilities and functions as a network device (such as a base station) or partially functions as a network device (such as a base station). In this case, the satellite can be regarded as a network device (such as a base station).
卫星可通过广播通信信号和导航信号等与终端进行无线通信。可选的,每颗卫星可以通过多个波束为终端设备提供通信服务、导航服务和定位服务等。例如,每颗卫星采用多个波束覆盖服务区域,不同波束之间的关系可为时分、频分和空分中的一种或多种。Satellites can communicate wirelessly with terminals via broadcast communication signals and navigation signals. Optionally, each satellite can provide communication, navigation, and positioning services to terminal devices through multiple beams. For example, each satellite uses multiple beams to cover the service area, and the relationship between different beams can be one or more of time-division, frequency-division, and space-division.
网关(或称地面站、地球站、信关站、关口站)(gateway),可用于连接卫星和地面的网络设备(比如地面的基站)。一个或多个卫星可以通过一个或多个网关连接到一个或多个地面的网络设备(比如地面的基站),在此不做限制。卫星与终端间的链路称作服务链路(service link),卫星与网关间的链路称作馈电链路(feeder link)。网络设备可以与网关分开部署,那么馈电链路的时延可以包括卫星到网关以及网关到网络设备的时延两部分。A gateway (also known as a ground station, earth station, or gateway) is a network device used to connect satellites and ground-based devices (such as ground base stations). One or more satellites can connect to one or more ground-based network devices (such as ground base stations) through one or more gateways; this is not a limitation. The link between a satellite and a terminal is called a service link, and the link between a satellite and a gateway is called a feeder link. Network devices can be deployed separately from gateways; therefore, the latency of the feeder link can include both the latency from the satellite to the gateway and the latency from the gateway to the network device.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以包括部署于卫星的网络设备(比如卫星基站),也可以包括部署于网关的网络设备,也可以包括部署于地面的网络设备(比如地面基站)。例如,网络设备可以为前述图1A、图1B和图1C所示的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点、O-RAN系统中的RAN节点等。相关内容参见前述描述,不再赘述。The network devices in this application embodiment may include network devices deployed on satellites (such as satellite base stations), network devices deployed on gateways, or network devices deployed on the ground (such as ground base stations). For example, the network devices may be radio access network (RAN) nodes, RAN nodes in O-RAN systems, etc., as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, and 1C. Related details are as described above and will not be repeated here.
核心网设备(core network,CN),是一种设置在地面且能与NTN系统中的NTN设备进行通信的设备。例如CN可以是图1A、图1B和图1C所涉及到的CN,相关内容参见前述描述,不再赘述。A core network (CN) device is a ground-based device that can communicate with NTN devices within an NTN system. For example, a CN can be the CN shown in Figures 1A, 1B, and 1C; relevant details are described above and will not be repeated here.
终端可以是图1A、图1B和图1C所涉及到的终端,相关内容参见前述描述,不再赘述。The terminal can be the terminal involved in Figures 1A, 1B and 1C. For relevant details, please refer to the above description and we will not repeat them here.
本申请实施例也可以适用于其他通信系统架构,比如空地(air to ground,ATG)通信系统,该通信系统包括至少一个网络设备和至少一个高空终端。高空终端例如包括高空飞机和机上终端等。上述图1D和图1E中的卫星也可以替换为其他中继设备,比如可以替换为高空平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)等其他NTN设备。图1D或图1E所示的通信系统作为一个示例,并不对本申请实施例提供的方法适用的通信系统构成限定。The embodiments of this application can also be applied to other communication system architectures, such as air-to-ground (ATG) communication systems, which include at least one network device and at least one high-altitude terminal. High-altitude terminals include, for example, high-altitude aircraft and onboard terminals. The satellites in Figures 1D and 1E can also be replaced with other relay devices, such as high-altitude platform stations (HAPS) or other NTN devices. The communication system shown in Figure 1D or 1E is merely an example and does not limit the communication systems to which the methods provided in the embodiments of this application are applicable.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例也可以适用于空地(air to ground,ATG)通信系统,作为示例,请参见图1F,为本申请实施例适用的又一种通信系统的网络架构示意图。该通信系统包括至少一个网络设备和至少一个高空终端设备。高空终端设备例如包括高空飞机和机上终端设备等。It is understood that the embodiments of this application can also be applied to air-to-ground (ATG) communication systems. As an example, please refer to Figure 1F, which is a schematic diagram of the network architecture of another communication system to which the embodiments of this application are applicable. The communication system includes at least one network device and at least one high-altitude terminal device. The high-altitude terminal device includes, for example, high-altitude aircraft and onboard terminal devices.
图1G示例性示出了本申请实施例适用的又一种可能的通信系统架构示意图。如图1G所示,该通信系统包括第一通信装置、第二通信装置、第三通信装置和终端装置。本申请实施例以第三通信装置为主通信装置,第一通信装置和第二通信装置为辅通信装置为例进行介绍。在图1G中,以第三通信装置为主卫星装置,第一通信装置为辅卫星装置#1,第二通信装置为辅卫星装置#2为例进行介绍。终端装置可以与主卫星装置建立RRC连接,与辅卫星装置不建立RRC连接。Figure 1G exemplarily illustrates another possible communication system architecture applicable to embodiments of this application. As shown in Figure 1G, the communication system includes a first communication device, a second communication device, a third communication device, and a terminal device. This application embodiment uses the third communication device as the primary communication device and the first and second communication devices as secondary communication devices. In Figure 1G, the third communication device is used as the primary satellite device, the first communication device as secondary satellite device #1, and the second communication device as secondary satellite device #2. The terminal device can establish an RRC connection with the primary satellite device but does not establish an RRC connection with the secondary satellite device.
本申请实施例中,主卫星装置和辅卫星装置#1可以与终端装置通信,例如主卫星装置和辅卫星装置#1在相同资源上向终端装置发送数据。终端装置可以基于第一信息确定是否需要从辅卫星装置#1切换至辅卫星装置#2。当终端装置确定需要切换至辅卫星装置#2的情况下,辅卫星装置#1切换至辅卫星装置#2。之后,主卫星装置和辅卫星装置#2可以与终端装置通信(终端装置停止与辅卫星装置#1通信,例如停止与辅卫星装置#1维持下行定时同步),例如主卫星装置和辅卫星装置#2在相同资源上向终端装置发送数据。In this embodiment, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #1 can communicate with the terminal device, for example, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #1 send data to the terminal device on the same resources. The terminal device can determine whether it needs to switch from the secondary satellite device #1 to the secondary satellite device #2 based on first information. When the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the secondary satellite device #2, the secondary satellite device #1 switches to the secondary satellite device #2. Afterwards, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #2 can communicate with the terminal device (the terminal device stops communicating with the secondary satellite device #1, for example, stops maintaining downlink timing synchronization with the secondary satellite device #1), for example, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device #2 send data to the terminal device on the same resources.
本申请实施例中,主卫星装置和辅卫星装置(例如辅卫星装置#1或辅卫星装置#2)具有在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据的能力(为了理解可以将该能力称为第一能力)。本申请实施例涉及到的“相同的资源”可以替换为“相同的时域资源”,也可以替换为“相同的频域资源”,也可以替换为“相同的频域资源,且相同的时域资源”,其他位置处的“相同的资源”的描述参见此处,不再重复描述。In this embodiment, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device (e.g., secondary satellite device #1 or secondary satellite device #2) have the capability to transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources) (for understanding, this capability can be referred to as the first capability). The term "same resources" in this embodiment can be replaced with "same time-domain resources," "same frequency-domain resources," or "same frequency-domain resources and the same time-domain resources." Descriptions of "same resources" in other locations are provided here and will not be repeated.
在实际应用中,主卫星装置和辅卫星装置可以使用该第一能力,即在相同的资源(例如相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据,或者说主卫星装置和辅卫星装置联合向终端装置进行数据传输。或者,主卫星装置和辅卫星装置不使用该第一能力,例如主卫星装置和辅卫星装置分别向终端装置发送的两个数据所占用的资源不属于相同的资源(例如该两个数据所占用的资源中的时域资源不同,频域资源不同);又例如,主卫星装置和辅卫星装置不需要联合向终端装置进行数据传输;又例如,终端装置可以与单颗卫星装置(主卫星装置或辅卫星装置)进行通信。In practical applications, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device can use this first capability, that is, to send data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), or in other words, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device jointly transmit data to the terminal device. Alternatively, the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device may not use this first capability, for example, the two data transmissions sent by the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device to the terminal device may occupy different resources (e.g., the time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources occupied by the two data transmissions may be different); or the primary satellite device and the secondary satellite device may not need to jointly transmit data to the terminal device; or the terminal device may communicate with a single satellite device (the primary satellite device or the secondary satellite device).
如图1G所示,终端装置可以为图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E或图1F涉及到的终端或终端内部的芯片系统。本申请实施例中的第一通信装置可以为图1D、图1E或图1F中的卫星或卫星内部的芯片系统,也可以为图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E或图1F涉及到中的网络设备(例如接入网设备、地面站等)或网络设备内部的芯片系统。本申请实施例中的第二通信装置可以为图1D、图1E或图1F中的卫星或卫星内部的芯片系统,也可以为图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E或图1F涉及到中的网络设备(例如接入网设备、地面站等)或网络设备内部的芯片系统。本申请实施例中的第三通信装置可以为图1D、图1E或图1F中的卫星或卫星内部的芯片系统,也可以为图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E或图1F涉及到中的网络设备(例如接入网设备、地面站等)或网络设备内部的芯片系统。As shown in Figure 1G, the terminal device can be the terminal or its internal chip system involved in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, or 1F. The first communication device in this embodiment can be a satellite or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1D, 1E, or 1F, or it can be a network device (e.g., access network equipment, ground station, etc.) or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, or 1F. The second communication device in this embodiment can be a satellite or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1D, 1E, or 1F, or it can be a network device (e.g., access network equipment, ground station, etc.) or its internal chip system as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, or 1F. The third communication device in this application embodiment can be a satellite or a chip system inside a satellite as shown in Figure 1D, Figure 1E or Figure 1F, or it can be a network device (e.g., access network device, ground station, etc.) or a chip system inside a network device as shown in Figure 1A, Figure 1B, Figure 1C, Figure 1D, Figure 1E or Figure 1F.
本申请实施例中的通信装置也可以替换为小区或传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)。例如,第三通信装置也可以替换为小区、第三小区或主小区。第一通信装置替换为小区、第一小区或辅小区。第二通信装置替换为小区、第二小区或辅小区。本申请实施例涉及到的辅通信装置也可以替换为辅小区。第三通信装置为第三小区,第二通信装置为第二小区,第一通信装置为第一小区的情况下,第三小区、第二小区和第一小区中的任两个小区可以分别属于不同的网络装置覆盖范围内的小区,或者属于同一个网络装置覆盖范围内的小区,本申请实施例对此不做限制。第三通信装置为第三小区,第二通信装置为第二小区(或者,第三通信装置为第三小区,第一通信装置为第一小区)的情况下,在第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据的情况下,该方案也可以称为多小区联合传输。The communication device in this application embodiment can also be replaced by a cell or a transmission reception point (TRP). For example, the third communication device can also be replaced by a cell, a third cell, or a primary cell. The first communication device can be replaced by a cell, a first cell, or a secondary cell. The second communication device can be replaced by a cell, a second cell, or a secondary cell. The secondary communication device involved in this application embodiment can also be replaced by a secondary cell. When the third communication device is the third cell, the second communication device is the second cell, and the first communication device is the first cell, any two of the third cell, the second cell, and the first cell can belong to cells within the coverage area of different network devices, or belong to cells within the coverage area of the same network device. This application embodiment does not impose any restrictions on this. When the third communication device is the third cell and the second communication device is the second cell (or, the third communication device is the third cell and the first communication device is the first cell), and the second communication device and the third communication device send data to the terminal device on the same resources (the same time domain resources and/or frequency domain resources), this scheme can also be called multi-cell joint transmission.
本申请实施例中的第三通信装置、第二通信装置和第一通信装置中的任意两个可以是同种类型的装置,也可以是不同类型的装置。In the embodiments of this application, any two of the third communication device, the second communication device, and the first communication device can be of the same type or different types.
例如,第三通信装置为第三卫星装置(例如为主卫星装置),第二通信装置为第二卫星装置(例如为辅卫星装置#2),第一通信装置为第一卫星装置(例如为辅卫星装置#1)。本申请实施例中的卫星装置(例如第一卫星装置、第二卫星装置和第三卫星装置)可以为图1D、图1E或图1F中的卫星或卫星内部的芯片系统。在第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据的情况下,该方案也可以称为多星联合传输。第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据,两个通信装置传输的信号对应的下行定时之间的差值小于第一阈值,这种传输方式也可以称为多星联合准同步传输。本申请实施例中第一阈值可以为循环前缀(cyclic prefix,CP)时长,也可以是其他设定值,还可以是基于CP时长计算的一个值(例如可以是CP时长加上或减去一个值,又例如,可以是CP时长与一个值的乘积)。第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据,两个通信装置传输的信号对应的下行定时之间的差值等于第一阈值,这种传输方式也可以称为多星联合准同步(或异步)传输。第二通信装置和第三通信装置在相同的资源(相同的时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据,两个通信装置传输的信号对应的下行定时之间的差值大于第一阈值,这种传输方式也可以称为多星联合异步传输。本申请实施例中,当第三通信装置、第二通信装置和第一通信装置中的任一项为卫星装置的情况下,该卫星装置的工作模式可以为透传模式或再生模式。第三通信装置、第二通信装置和第一通信装置中的任意两项的工作模式可以相同或不同。For example, the third communication device is a third satellite device (e.g., a primary satellite device), the second communication device is a second satellite device (e.g., auxiliary satellite device #2), and the first communication device is a first satellite device (e.g., auxiliary satellite device #1). The satellite devices (e.g., the first, second, and third satellite devices) in this embodiment can be satellites or internal chip systems within satellites as shown in Figures 1D, 1E, or 1F. When the second and third communication devices transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources), this scheme can also be called multi-satellite joint transmission. When the second and third communication devices transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (the same time-domain and/or frequency-domain resources), and the difference between the downlink timings corresponding to the signals transmitted by the two communication devices is less than a first threshold, this transmission method can also be called multi-satellite joint quasi-synchronous transmission. In this embodiment, the first threshold can be the cyclic prefix (CP) duration, or other set values, or a value calculated based on the CP duration (e.g., the CP duration plus or minus a value, or, for example, the CP duration multiplied by a value). When the second and third communication devices transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), and the difference between the downlink timings corresponding to the signals transmitted by the two communication devices is equal to a first threshold, this transmission method can also be called multi-satellite joint quasi-synchronous (or asynchronous) transmission. When the second and third communication devices transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (the same time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources), and the difference between the downlink timings corresponding to the signals transmitted by the two communication devices is greater than a first threshold, this transmission method can also be called multi-satellite joint asynchronous transmission. In the embodiments of this application, when any one of the third, second, and first communication devices is a satellite device, the operating mode of the satellite device can be a transparent transmission mode or a regeneration mode. The operating modes of any two of the third, second, and first communication devices can be the same or different.
又例如,第三通信装置为网络设备(例如接入网设备、地面站等),第二通信装置和第一通信装置为卫星装置。又例如,第三通信装置为卫星装置,第二通信装置和第一通信装置为网络设备(例如接入网设备、地面站等)。又例如,第三通信装置、第二通信装置和第三通信装置为三个网络设备(例如接入网设备、地面站等)。For example, the third communication device is a network device (such as access network equipment, ground station, etc.), and the second and first communication devices are satellite devices. Alternatively, the third communication device is a satellite device, and the second and first communication devices are network devices (such as access network equipment, ground station, etc.). Or, the third, second, and third communication devices are three network devices (such as access network equipment, ground station, etc.).
基于图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E、图1F和图1G中的至少一项所示的内容以及上述其他内容,图2示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的可能的流程示意图。为了便于理解,图2中以终端装置、第一通信装置、第二通信装置和第三通信装置的交互为例进行介绍。终端装置、第一通信装置、第二通信装置和第三通信装置的相关示例可以参见前述图1G的描述,不再赘述。Based on the content shown in at least one of Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, and 1G, as well as the other content mentioned above, Figure 2 exemplarily illustrates a possible flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. For ease of understanding, Figure 2 uses the interaction of a terminal device, a first communication device, a second communication device, and a third communication device as an example. Examples of the terminal device, the first communication device, the second communication device, and the third communication device can be found in the description of Figure 1G above, and will not be repeated here.
例如,第一通信装置为第一卫星装置(或称第一辅通信装置、第一辅卫星装置、辅卫星装置#1),第二通信装置为第二卫星装置(或称第二辅通信装置、第二辅卫星装置、辅卫星装置#2),第三通信装置为第三卫星装置(或为主卫星装置)。图2提供的了一种终端装置切换辅通信装置的示例,本申请实施例提供的方案中,终端装置可以与一个或多个辅通信装置进行通信,终端装置可以从一个或多个辅通信装置切换至一个或多个辅通信装置,本申请实施例中以终端装置从一个辅通信装置(第一通信装置)切换至另一个辅通信装置(第二通信装置)为例进行介绍,其他辅通信装置的切换流程也可以参见终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置的流程,不再赘述。本申请实施例中,终端装置可以与主通信装置建立RRC连接,与辅通信装置可以无需建立RRC连接。终端装置可以与主通信装置之间进行通信(例如发送上行或下行数据),终端装置也可以与辅通信装置之间进行通信(例如发送上行或下行数据)。For example, the first communication device is a first satellite device (or first auxiliary communication device, first auxiliary satellite device, auxiliary satellite device #1), the second communication device is a second satellite device (or second auxiliary communication device, second auxiliary satellite device, auxiliary satellite device #2), and the third communication device is a third satellite device (or a primary satellite device). Figure 2 provides an example of a terminal device switching auxiliary communication devices. In the scheme provided by this application embodiment, the terminal device can communicate with one or more auxiliary communication devices, and the terminal device can switch from one or more auxiliary communication devices to one or more auxiliary communication devices. This application embodiment uses the example of the terminal device switching from one auxiliary communication device (first communication device) to another auxiliary communication device (second communication device) as an example. The switching process for other auxiliary communication devices can also refer to the process of the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, and will not be repeated here. In this application embodiment, the terminal device can establish an RRC connection with the primary communication device, but does not need to establish an RRC connection with the auxiliary communication device. The terminal device can communicate with the primary communication device (e.g., send uplink or downlink data), and the terminal device can also communicate with the auxiliary communication devices (e.g., send uplink or downlink data).
下面结合附图进行介绍。The following description is provided in conjunction with the accompanying diagram.
步骤201,终端装置获取第一信息,根据第一信息确定从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。Step 201: The terminal device obtains the first information and determines to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device based on the first information.
本申请实施例中,第一信息可以包括/替换为:用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域,或用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的信息。In this application embodiment, the first information may include/be replaced with: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
例如第一信息包括/为:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第二通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、第一时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。第一区域包括/为终端装置所在的区域。For example, the first information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the location of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device), and information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the second communication device). The first region includes/is the region where the terminal device is located.
下面通过实施方式A1和实施方式A2示例性介绍两种终端装置如何基于第一信息判断是否需要切换通信装置的实施方式。在实施方式A1中,终端装置可以根据第一信息(例如第二通信装置的信息)判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置。在实施方式A2中,终端装置可以基于第一信息(例如第二通信装置的信息)以及第二信息(例如第一通信装置的信息)的信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置。The following describes two implementation methods for how a terminal device determines whether to switch communication devices based on first information, using implementation methods A1 and A2 as examples. In implementation method A1, the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the second communication device based on the first information (e.g., information about the second communication device). In implementation method A2, the terminal device can determine whether to switch to the second communication device based on both the first information (e.g., information about the second communication device) and the second information (e.g., information about the first communication device).
实施方式A1,终端装置可以根据第一信息(例如第二通信装置的信息)判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置。In implementation method A1, the terminal device can determine whether it needs to switch to the second communication device based on the first information (e.g., information of the second communication device).
在实施方式A1中,终端装置在判断是否需要切换通信装置时,可以不结合其他通信装置的信息(例如第二信息)。例如,终端装置可以根据第一信息判断第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。例如,若第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括/为第一区域,则终端装置确定需要切换至第二通信装置(或将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置)。又例如,若第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域,则终端装置确定不需要切换辅通信装置。由于终端装置可以基于第一信息判断是否切换通信装置,因此该方案中无需其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)下发切换的指令,进而可以节省信令开销。In implementation A1, when determining whether to switch communication devices, the terminal device may not need to consider information from other communication devices (e.g., second information). For example, the terminal device can determine whether the area served by the second communication device includes the first area based on the first information. For example, if the first information indicates that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first area, the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the second communication device (or switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device). Alternatively, if the first information indicates that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, the terminal device determines that it does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device. Since the terminal device can determine whether to switch communication devices based on the first information, this scheme does not require other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to issue switching instructions, thereby saving signaling overhead.
终端装置基于第一信息判断第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的方式也有多种。例如,终端装置在第一信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。终端装置在第一信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域也可以替换为:终端装置在第一信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定需切换至第二通信装置。There are several ways for a terminal device to determine whether the area served by the second communication device includes the first area based on the first information. For example, if the first information meets the first condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. Alternatively, the terminal device can determine that, if the first information meets the first condition, the area served by the second communication device includes the first area.
第一条件例如包括/为以下一项或多项:第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围(实施方式A1.1);第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围(实施方式A1.2);第一时间信息指示的时间(例如当前时间)属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段(实施方式A1.3);第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围(实施方式A1.4);第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围(实施方式A1.5);第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围(实施方式A1.6);第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一变化率范围(实施方式A1.7);第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二变化率范围(实施方式A1.8)。The first condition includes, for example, one or more of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range (Implementation A1.1); the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first orbital angle range (Implementation A1.2); the time indicated by the first time information (e.g., the current time) belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area (Implementation A1.3); the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler range (Implementation A1.4); the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range (Implementation A1.5); the TA corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first TA range (Implementation A1.6); the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first change rate range (Implementation A1.7); the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the second change rate range (Implementation A1.8).
实施方式A1.1,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置对应的仰角为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围。In implementation method A1.1, taking the first information including/as the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range.
本申请实施例中的仰角可以由两条线构成。仰角可以替换为“通信仰角”。比如第二通信装置对应的仰角可以由途经第二通信装置的线和该线在一个面上的投影之间的夹角构成。比如,仰角可以包括:以终端装置(或地面参考点)为起点射向第二通信装置的线与线在水平面上的投影之间的夹角。The elevation angle in this embodiment can be formed by two lines. The elevation angle can be replaced by a "direction angle". For example, the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be formed by the angle between the line passing through the second communication device and the projection of the line on a plane. For example, the elevation angle can include: the angle between the line originating from the terminal device (or ground reference point) and the projection of the line on the horizontal plane.
本申请实施例中的仰角的取值范围可以为[0°,90°]。再比如仰角包括视线在水平线以上时,在视线所在的垂直平面内,视线与水平线所成的角叫做仰角。再比如,仰角包括通信装置(例如卫星装置)与终端装置所在处的地平线之间的夹角。仰角也可以用来描述通信装置(例如卫星装置)在某时刻经过终端装置(或地面参考点)上方的位置,比如仰角为90°可以表示通信装置(例如卫星装置)在终端装置(或地面参考点)的正上方。因为仰角与终端装置(或地面参考点)所处位置有关,所以对于地面上不同的终端装置(或地面参考点)来说,观察同一个通信装置(例如卫星装置)的仰角是不同的,另外仰角还随着通信装置(例如卫星装置)在其轨道上的运动而不断变化。The elevation angle in this embodiment can range from [0°, 90°]. For example, when the line of sight is above the horizontal line, the angle between the line of sight and the horizontal line in the vertical plane is called the elevation angle. For another example, the elevation angle includes the angle between the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) and the horizon where the terminal device is located. The elevation angle can also be used to describe the position of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) above the terminal device (or ground reference point) at a certain moment; for example, an elevation angle of 90° can indicate that the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) is directly above the terminal device (or ground reference point). Because the elevation angle is related to the position of the terminal device (or ground reference point), the elevation angle of the same communication device (e.g., a satellite device) will be different for different terminal devices (or ground reference points) on the ground. Furthermore, the elevation angle changes continuously as the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) moves in its orbit.
终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的仰角的方案有多种。例如,终端装置可以根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定仰角。比如,终端装置根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定出第二通信装置的位置,继而根据第二通信装置的位置和终端装置的位置计算出第二通信装置仰角。第二通信装置为卫星装置的情况下,第二通信装置的星历信息例如可以包括该卫星装置的速度信息、卫星装置的运动轨迹信息、卫星装置的位置信息,以及卫星装置的位置信息对应的时间信息等。There are several methods for a terminal device to obtain the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the terminal device can determine the elevation angle based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device. For instance, the terminal device can determine the position of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information, and then calculate the elevation angle of the second communication device based on the position of the second communication device and the position of the terminal device. If the second communication device is a satellite device, its ephemeris information may include, for example, the satellite device's velocity information, its trajectory information, its position information, and the time information corresponding to its position.
又例如,终端装置获取地面参考点的位置。地面参考点可以为一个区域中的一个点,例如可以为一个区域的较为靠近中心区域(或者位于中心区域)的一个点。地面参考点可复用小区重选或条件切换(conditional handover,CHO)测量流程中的地面参考点。该地面参考点的位置可以是预先配置在终端装置侧的,或者该地面参考点的位置是其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)向终端装置发送的,又或者,该地面参考点的位置是终端装置根据预设的规则确定的。比如,终端装置根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定出第二通信装置的位置,继而根据第二通信装置的位置和地面参考点的位置计算出仰角,该仰角为第二通信装置仰角。一个区域内的两个终端装置计算第二通信装置的仰角时,可以都是根据第二通信装置的位置和该地面参考点的位置计算的第二通信装置对应的仰角,这种情况下,该区域内的不同的两个终端装置计算出的第二通信装置对应的仰角可能相等。For example, the terminal device acquires the position of a ground reference point. The ground reference point can be a point within an area, such as a point relatively close to (or located in) the central area of an area. The ground reference point can be reused from ground reference points used in cell reselection or conditional handover (CHO) measurement procedures. The position of this ground reference point can be pre-configured on the terminal device side, or it can be sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device), or the position can be determined by the terminal device according to preset rules. For instance, the terminal device determines the position of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information, and then calculates the elevation angle based on the position of the second communication device and the position of the ground reference point. This elevation angle is the elevation angle of the second communication device. When two terminal devices within an area calculate the elevation angle of the second communication device, they can both calculate the corresponding elevation angle based on the position of the second communication device and the position of the ground reference point. In this case, the elevation angles calculated by two different terminal devices within the area may be equal.
图3示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种可能的仰角的示意图。如图3所示,终端装置所在位置为坐标系的原点。该坐标系的三个坐标轴分别表示为x轴、y轴和z轴,三个坐标轴之间的任意两个轴之间互相垂直。图3中以第一通信装置为辅卫星装置#1、第二通信装置为辅卫星装置#2,第三通信装置为主卫星装置为例进行示意。通信系统还可以包括其他卫星装置,图3中未示出。第一通信装置、第二通信装置和第三通信装置中的任意两个的轨道可以为同一个轨道,也可以为不同的轨道,图3中为一种可能的示例。Figure 3 illustrates a possible elevation angle provided by an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 3, the terminal device is located at the origin of the coordinate system. The three coordinate axes of this coordinate system are represented as the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis, and any two of the three axes are perpendicular to each other. Figure 3 illustrates an example with the first communication device as auxiliary satellite device #1, the second communication device as auxiliary satellite device #2, and the third communication device as the primary satellite device. The communication system may also include other satellite devices, which are not shown in Figure 3. The orbits of any two of the first, second, and third communication devices can be the same orbit or different orbits; Figure 3 shows one possible example.
请参阅图3,线#13为终端装置为起点射向第二通信装置的线。图3中以线#14表示线#13在水平面上的投影。θ2为线#13与线#13在水平面上的投影(线#14)之间的夹角。θ2为第二通信装置对应的仰角。类似的,线#11为终端装置为起点射向第一通信装置的线。图3中以线#12表示线#11在水平面上的投影。θ1为线#11与线#11在水平面上的投影(线#12)之间的夹角。θ1为第一通信装置对应的仰角。Please refer to Figure 3. Line #13 is the line originating from the terminal device and projected towards the second communication device. In Figure 3, line #14 represents the projection of line #13 onto the horizontal plane. θ2 is the angle between line #13 and its projection onto the horizontal plane (line #14). θ2 is the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device. Similarly, line #11 is the line originating from the terminal device and projected towards the first communication device. In Figure 3, line #12 represents the projection of line #11 onto the horizontal plane. θ1 is the angle between line #11 and its projection onto the horizontal plane (line #12). θ1 is the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device.
图3中所示的仰角是以终端装置所在位置为坐标系原点为例进行示意的,实际应用中,计算仰角的坐标系的原点可以替换为地面参考点的位置。图3中所示的仰角为一种可能的示例,实际应用中也可以用其他角度表示仰角,比如第一通信装置对应的仰角为θ1,第二通信装置对应的仰角可以为θ2的补角或余角。再比如,第一通信装置对应的仰角为θ1的补角或余角,第二通信装置对应的仰角可以为θ2。再比如第一通信装置对应的仰角为θ1的补角或余角,第二通信装置对应的仰角可以为θ2的补角或余角。The elevation angle shown in Figure 3 is illustrated using the location of the terminal device as the origin of the coordinate system. In practical applications, the origin of the coordinate system for calculating the elevation angle can be replaced by the location of a ground reference point. The elevation angle shown in Figure 3 is one possible example; in practical applications, other angles can also be used to represent the elevation angle. For example, the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device is θ1 , and the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of θ2 . Alternatively, the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of θ1 , and the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be θ2 . Again, the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of θ1 , and the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device can be the supplementary or complementary angle of θ2 .
在实施方式A1.1中,终端装置可以获取第一仰角范围,继而根据第二通信装置的仰角是否位于第一仰角范围来确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。例如,当第二通信装置的仰角属于第一仰角范围的情况下,终端装置确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如,当第二通信装置的仰角不属于第一仰角范围的情况下,终端装置确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In implementation A1.1, the terminal device can obtain a first elevation angle range, and then determine whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area based on whether the elevation angle of the second communication device is within the first elevation angle range. For example, when the elevation angle of the second communication device is within the first elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services includes the first area. As another example, when the elevation angle of the second communication device is not within the first elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
终端装置可以获取用于指示第一仰角范围的信息,并基于用于指示第一仰角范围的信息确定第一仰角范围。用于指示第一仰角范围的信息可以是预配置的,也可以是协议定义的,或者为其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)指示的。The terminal device can acquire information indicating the first elevation angle range and determine the first elevation angle range based on the information indicating the first elevation angle range. The information indicating the first elevation angle range can be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
用于指示第一仰角范围的信息可以为仰角值的信息,也可以为与第一仰角范围有关联关系的索引值。下面通过以下几个示例对用于指示第一仰角范围的信息的具体形式进行介绍。The information used to indicate the first elevation angle range can be either elevation angle values or index values related to the first elevation angle range. The following examples illustrate the specific forms of information used to indicate the first elevation angle range.
示例一,该用于指示第一仰角范围的信息包括两个仰角值。该两个仰角值用于指示该第一仰角范围的两个边界,比如该仰角范围为[50°,90°],该仰角范围的指示信息包括的仰角值为50°和90°。Example 1: The information used to indicate the first elevation angle range includes two elevation angle values. These two elevation angle values are used to indicate the two boundaries of the first elevation angle range. For example, if the elevation angle range is [50°, 90°], the information indicating the elevation angle range includes elevation angle values of 50° and 90°.
本申请实施例中“°”用于表示角度的符号。本申请实施例中表示角度范围的符号“[]”可以替换为“()”。比如,[50°,90°]可以替换为(50°,90°),50°和90°可以视为该仰角范围的边界。[50°,90°]表示该仰角范围包括50°和90°。(50°,90°)表示该仰角范围不包括50°和90°。In this application embodiment, "°" is used as a symbol to represent angle. In this application embodiment, the symbol "[]" representing an angle range can be replaced with "()". For example, [50°, 90°] can be replaced with (50°, 90°), where 50° and 90° can be considered the boundaries of the elevation angle range. [50°, 90°] indicates that the elevation angle range includes 50° and 90°. (50°, 90°) indicates that the elevation angle range does not include 50° and 90°.
示例二,该用于指示第一仰角范围的信息可以包括一个仰角的值。该仰角的值为第一仰角范围中的最小的仰角值。第一仰角范围中的最大仰角值为预定义的值,例如可以为90°。比如用于指示第一仰角范围的信息为一个仰角的值,该仰角的值为50°。则第一仰角范围为[50°,90°]。该最大仰角值可以预配置在终端装置侧或由协议约定,或者由其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)发送给终端装置。Example 2: The information used to indicate the first elevation angle range may include an elevation angle value. This elevation angle value is the minimum elevation angle value within the first elevation angle range. The maximum elevation angle value within the first elevation angle range is a predefined value, such as 90°. For example, if the information used to indicate the first elevation angle range is an elevation angle value of 50°, then the first elevation angle range is [50°, 90°]. This maximum elevation angle value may be pre-configured on the terminal device side or agreed upon by a protocol, or sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
示例三,该用于指示第一仰角范围的信息可以包括一个仰角的值。该仰角的值可以指示出第一仰角范围的两个边界,比如该仰角的值为60°。该仰角的值的前后30°(即[30°,90°])的范围为该第一仰角范围,其中该30°为一个示例,也可以替换为其他预设的角度值。该预设的角度值。可以预配置在终端装置侧或由协议约定,或者由其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)发送给终端装置。Example 3: The information used to indicate the first elevation angle range may include an elevation angle value. This elevation angle value may indicate the two boundaries of the first elevation angle range, for example, the elevation angle value is 60°. The range before and after this elevation angle value within 30° (i.e., [30°, 90°]) constitutes the first elevation angle range, where 30° is an example and can be replaced with other preset angle values. This preset angle value may be pre-configured on the terminal device side or agreed upon by a protocol, or sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
示例四,该用于指示第一仰角范围的信息可以包括索引值。该索引值与第一仰角范围有关联关系,终端装置可以基于索引值,查找出该索引值关联的仰角范围,继而确定出第一仰角范围。Example 4: The information used to indicate the first elevation angle range may include an index value. This index value is associated with the first elevation angle range, and the terminal device can use the index value to find the elevation angle range associated with the index value, thereby determining the first elevation angle range.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息,这些辅通信装置可以作为待切换的辅通信装置,第二通信装置属于该多个辅通信装置。一种可能的实施方式中,这些辅通信装置之间可以存在优先级,例如第一通信装置的优先级高于第二通信装置,第二通信装置为第一通信装置之后的优先级最高的待切换通信装置。第二通信装置可以为这些候选辅通信装置中优先级最高的,因此终端装置在需要切换辅通信装置的情况下(例如终端装置确定第一通信装置当前或未来即将无法为终端装置提供服务),可以依据优先级优先判断第二通信装置是否可以为终端装置提供服务(例如根据第一信息判断第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域)。这些辅通信装置的优先级信息(例如可以以辅通信装置的列表的形式指示优先级信息)可以是预先配置在终端装置侧的,或者是其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)向终端装置通知的。又一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置可以确定出多个能够为终端装置提供服务的辅通信装置,之后依据这些辅通信装置的信号质量,选择一个质量最优或较优的通信装置作为待切换的目标辅通信装置。In one possible implementation, the terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched over). These auxiliary communication devices can be designated as auxiliary communication devices to be switched over, and the second communication device belongs to this group of auxiliary communication devices. In another possible implementation, these auxiliary communication devices can have priorities; for example, the first communication device has a higher priority than the second communication device, and the second communication device is the highest priority communication device to be switched over after the first communication device. The second communication device can be the highest priority among these candidate auxiliary communication devices. Therefore, when the terminal device needs to switch auxiliary communication devices (e.g., the terminal device determines that the first communication device is currently or will soon be unable to provide service to the terminal device), it can determine whether the second communication device can provide service to the terminal device based on priority (e.g., determining whether the area where the second communication device provides service includes the first area based on first information). The priority information of these auxiliary communication devices (e.g., priority information can be indicated in the form of a list of auxiliary communication devices) can be pre-configured on the terminal device side or notified to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device). In another possible implementation, the terminal device can identify multiple auxiliary communication devices that can provide services to the terminal device, and then select the communication device with the best or better quality as the target auxiliary communication device to be switched based on the signal quality of these auxiliary communication devices.
下面通过表1示例性示出一种终端装置获取的通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息的示例。如表1所示,一个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括该通信装置的索引、通信装置的星历信息,用于指示该通信装置对应的仰角范围的信息。表1中以用于指示该通信装置对应的仰角范围的信息包括仰角范围的两个边界值为例进行示意。不同通信装置对应的仰角范围可以相同,也可以不同。第二通信装置例如为通信装置#1,则第一仰角范围为[仰角角度#3,仰角角度#4]。The following table exemplifies an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device. As shown in Table 1, the information of a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and information indicating the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device. Table 1 illustrates an example where the information indicating the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device includes two boundary values of the elevation angle range. The elevation angle ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the first elevation angle range is [elevation angle #3, elevation angle #4].
表1候选辅通信装置的信息的示例
Table 1 Examples of information on candidate auxiliary communication devices
下面通过表2示例性示出又一种通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息的示例。表2中以用于指示该通信装置对应的仰角范围的信息包括仰角范围中的最小仰角角度为例进行示意。第二通信装置例如为通信装置#1,则第一仰角范围为[仰角角度#3,最大仰角角度]。最大仰角角度可以为预设值,例如可以为90度。表2中的其他内容与表1中类似,不再赘述。The following table exemplifies information about another type of communication device (or auxiliary communication device, or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched to) using Table 2. Table 2 illustrates information indicating the elevation angle range corresponding to this communication device, including the minimum elevation angle within that range. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the first elevation angle range is [elevation angle #3, maximum elevation angle]. The maximum elevation angle can be a preset value, for example, 90 degrees. Other content in Table 2 is similar to that in Table 1 and will not be repeated.
表2通信装置的信息的示例
Table 2 Examples of information about communication devices
终端装置获取的各个通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的优选级可以是预配置的,或者协议定义的,或者为其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)指示的。其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)可以显示或隐式的指示各个通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的优先级。The priority of each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched) acquired by the terminal device may be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device). Other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) may explicitly or implicitly indicate the priority of each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched).
例如,各个通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的优先级可以为列表中各个待切换的辅通信装置的排序关系,例如表1中,通信装置#0的优先级高于通信装置#1的优先级,通信装置#1的优先级高于通信装置#2的优先级。终端装置在确定需要切换通信装置的情况下,可以优先判断通信装置#0是否为第一区域提供服务,若不提供,则终端装置可以继续判断通信装置#1是否为第一区域提供服务,若提供服务,则终端装置可以切换至通信装置#1;若不提供服务,则终端装置可以继续判断通信装置#2是否为第一区域提供服务。一种可能的实施方式中,各个通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的优先级可能是依据各个通信装置为第一区域提供服务的先后顺序确定的,例如依据各个通信装置的移动规律,最早为第一区域提供服务(或者说一个通信装置的仰角最早位于该通信装置对应的仰角范围内)的通信装置的优先级可以为最高的;第二为第一区域提供服务(或者说一个通信装置的仰角第二位于该通信装置对应的仰角范围内)的通信装置的优先级可以为次高的,依次类推。For example, the priority of each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched) can be the sorting relationship of each auxiliary communication device to be switched in the list. For example, in Table 1, the priority of communication device #0 is higher than the priority of communication device #1, and the priority of communication device #1 is higher than the priority of communication device #2. When the terminal device determines that a communication device needs to be switched, it can first determine whether communication device #0 provides service to the first area. If it does not provide service, the terminal device can continue to determine whether communication device #1 provides service to the first area. If it provides service, the terminal device can switch to communication device #1; if it does not provide service, the terminal device can continue to determine whether communication device #2 provides service to the first area. In one possible implementation, the priority of each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched) may be determined based on the order in which each communication device provides services to the first area. For example, based on the movement pattern of each communication device, the communication device that provides services to the first area earliest (or the communication device whose elevation angle is earliest within the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device) may have the highest priority; the communication device that provides services to the first area second (or the communication device whose elevation angle is second within the elevation angle range corresponding to the communication device) may have the second highest priority, and so on.
终端装置还可以获取通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的其他信息,例如通信装置的标识、下行同步参考信号序列信息)、下行同步信号频点、测量定时配置、极化信息等。这些信息中的一项或多项可以是预配置的,或者协议定义的,或者为其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)指示的。这些信息可以辅助终端装置进行辅通信装置的切换,例如终端装置确定需要切换至第二通信装置后,可以基于这些第二通信装置的信息更加快速的搜索到第二通信装置的同步信号,继而更加快速的实现与第二通信装置的定时同步(或下行定时同步)。The terminal device can also acquire other information about the communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched to), such as the communication device's identifier, downlink synchronization reference signal sequence information, downlink synchronization signal frequency, measurement timing configuration, polarization information, etc. One or more of this information may be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device). This information can assist the terminal device in switching to the auxiliary communication device. For example, after determining that it needs to switch to the second communication device, the terminal device can more quickly search for the synchronization signal of the second communication device based on this information, thereby achieving timing synchronization (or downlink timing synchronization) with the second communication device more quickly.
实施方式A1.2,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置对应的轨道角度为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围。In implementation method A1.2, taking the first information as the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the first orbital angle.
本申请实施例中用于描述轨道区间的角度范围中的角度可以包括:途经通信装置(例如卫星装置)的与该通信装置(例如卫星装置)的轨道中心的线,以及位于该通信装置(例如卫星装置)的轨道的参考点与该通信装置(例如卫星装置)的轨道中心的连线之间的夹角。比如,第一轨道角度范围中的角度包括:第二通信装置的轨道上的点与第二通信装置的轨道中心的连线,以及第二通信装置的轨道的参考点与第二通信装置的轨道中心的连线之间的夹角。In this embodiment of the application, the angles used to describe the angle range of the orbital interval may include: the angle between a line passing through the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) and the center of the orbit of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device), and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device) and the center of the orbit of the communication device (e.g., a satellite device). For example, the angles in the first orbital angle range include: the angle between a line connecting a point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device, and the angle between a reference point on the orbit of the second communication device and the center of the orbit of the second communication device.
本申请实施例中的用于指示轨道区间的角度的取值范围可以为[0°,360°]。本申请实施例中不同通信装置(例如卫星装置)的轨道的参考点可以不同。本申请实施例中的参考点可以包括升轨和通信装置(例如卫星装置)的轨道面交点,或者包括升轨与黄道面交点。黄道面(ecliptic plane)可以指地球绕太阳公转的轨道平面。升轨可以指卫星运动方向是从地球南极向地球北极,反之可以称之为降轨。In this application embodiment, the angle used to indicate the orbital interval can range from [0°, 360°]. In this application embodiment, the reference point for the orbits of different communication devices (e.g., satellite devices) can be different. The reference point in this application embodiment may include the intersection of the ascending orbit and the orbital plane of the communication device (e.g., satellite device), or the intersection of the ascending orbit and the ecliptic plane. The ecliptic plane can refer to the orbital plane of the Earth's revolution around the Sun. An ascending orbit can refer to a satellite's motion from the Earth's South Pole to the Earth's North Pole; conversely, a descending orbit can be referred to as a downward orbit.
终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的轨道角度的方案有多种。例如,终端装置可以根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定轨道角度。比如,终端装置根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定出第二通信装置的位置,继而根据第二通信装置的位置和第二通信装置的轨道中心的位置计算出第二通信装置轨道角度。There are several methods for a terminal device to obtain the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the terminal device can determine the orbital angle based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device. For instance, the terminal device can determine the position of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information, and then calculate the orbital angle of the second communication device based on its position and the position of its orbital center.
图4示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种可能的轨道角度的示意图。图4中以第一通信装置为辅卫星装置#1、第二通信装置为辅卫星装置#2为例进行示意。通信系统还可以包括其他卫星装置,图3中未示出。第一通信装置和第二通信装置中的任意两个的轨道可以为同一个轨道,也可以为不同的轨道,图3中为一种可能的示例。Figure 4 illustrates a possible orbital angle provided by an embodiment of this application. Figure 4 uses a first communication device as auxiliary satellite device #1 and a second communication device as auxiliary satellite device #2 as an example. The communication system may also include other satellite devices, not shown in Figure 3. The orbits of any two of the first and second communication devices can be the same orbit or different orbits; Figure 3 shows one possible example.
请参阅图4,图4示出了第二通信装置和第一通信装置的轨道面,图4中以该第二通信装置和第一通信装置所在的两个轨道的轨道中心为同一个点进行示例,实际应用中,不同通信装置(例如卫星装置)的轨道中心可以不同。图4中示例性示出了第一通信装置的轨道上的参考点#22,以及第二通信装置的轨道上的参考点#21。Please refer to Figure 4, which shows the orbital planes of the second communication device and the first communication device. Figure 4 uses the orbital centers of the two orbits as an example, but in practical applications, the orbital centers of different communication devices (e.g., satellite devices) may be different. Figure 4 exemplarily shows reference point #22 on the orbit of the first communication device and reference point #21 on the orbit of the second communication device.
如图4所示,参考点#21与第二通信装置的轨道中心的连线,以及第二通信装置与第二通信装置的轨道中心的连线之间的夹角为r2。r2例如可以为第二通信装置对应的轨道角度。类似的,参考点#22与第一通信装置的轨道中心的连线,以及第一通信装置与第一通信装置的轨道中心的连线之间的夹角为r1。r1例如可以为第一通信装置对应的轨道角度。As shown in Figure 4, the angle between the line connecting reference point #21 and the track center of the second communication device, and the line connecting the two track centers of the second communication device, is r2 . r2 can be, for example, the track angle corresponding to the second communication device. Similarly, the angle between the line connecting reference point #22 and the track center of the first communication device, and the line connecting the two track centers of the first communication device, is r1 . r1 can be, for example, the track angle corresponding to the first communication device.
在实施方式A1.2中,终端装置可以获取第一轨道角度范围,继而根据第二通信装置的轨道角度是否位于第一轨道角度范围来确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。例如,当第二通信装置的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围的情况下,终端装置确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如,当第二通信装置的轨道角度不属于第一轨道角度范围的情况下,终端装置确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In implementation method A1.2, the terminal device can acquire a first orbital angle range, and then determine whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area based on whether the orbital angle of the second communication device is within the first orbital angle range. For example, when the orbital angle of the second communication device is within the first orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services includes the first area. As another example, when the orbital angle of the second communication device is not within the first orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the area where the first information indicates the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
终端装置可以获取用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息,并基于用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息确定第一轨道角度范围。用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息可以是预配置的,也可以是协议定义的,或者为其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)指示的。The terminal device can acquire information indicating a first track angle range and determine the first track angle range based on the information indicating the first track angle range. The information indicating the first track angle range can be pre-configured, protocol-defined, or indicated by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息可以为轨道角度值的信息,也可以为与第一轨道角度范围有关联关系的索引值。下面通过以下几个示例对用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息的具体形式进行介绍。The information used to indicate the first track angle range can be track angle values or index values related to the first track angle range. The following examples illustrate the specific forms of information used to indicate the first track angle range.
示例一,该用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息包括两个轨道角度值。该两个轨道角度值用于指示该第一轨道角度范围的两个边界,比如该轨道角度范围为[50°,130°],该轨道角度范围的指示信息包括的轨道角度值为50°和130°。Example 1: The information used to indicate the first track angle range includes two track angle values. These two track angle values are used to indicate the two boundaries of the first track angle range. For example, if the track angle range is [50°, 130°], the information indicating the track angle range includes track angle values of 50° and 130°.
示例二,该用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息可以包括一个轨道角度的值。例如该轨道角度的值为第一轨道角度范围内的最小的或最大的值,该轨道角度范围的另一个边界值由协议定义或预先配置。又例如该轨道角度的值可以指示出第一轨道角度范围的两个边界。比如该轨道角度的值为90°。该轨道角度的值的前后40°(即[50°,130°])的范围为该第一轨道角度范围,其中该40°为一个示例,也可以替换为其他预设的角度值。该预设的角度值。可以预配置在终端装置侧或由协议约定,或者由其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)发送给终端装置。Example 2: The information used to indicate the first track angle range may include a track angle value. For example, the track angle value could be the minimum or maximum value within the first track angle range, with another boundary value defined by the protocol or pre-configured. Alternatively, the track angle value could indicate the two boundaries of the first track angle range. For instance, the track angle value could be 90°. The first track angle range is defined by a 40° range before and after the track angle value (i.e., [50°, 130°]), where 40° is an example and can be replaced by other preset angle values. These preset angle values can be pre-configured on the terminal device side, agreed upon by the protocol, or sent to the terminal device by other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device).
示例三,该用于指示第一轨道角度范围的信息可以包括索引值。该索引值与第一轨道角度范围有关联关系,终端装置可以基于索引值,查找出该索引值关联的轨道角度范围,继而确定出第一轨道角度范围。Example 3: The information used to indicate the first track angle range may include an index value. This index value is associated with the first track angle range, and the terminal device can use the index value to find the track angle range associated with the index value, thereby determining the first track angle range.
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息,这些辅通信装置可以作为待切换的辅通信装置,第二通信装置属于该多个辅通信装置。终端装置基于这些通信装置的信息判断该通信装置是否为第一区域提供服务。In one possible implementation, the terminal device can acquire information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched over), which can serve as auxiliary communication devices to be switched over, and the second communication device belongs to these multiple auxiliary communication devices. Based on the information from these communication devices, the terminal device determines whether the communication device provides service to the first area.
下面通过表3示例性示出一种终端装置获取的通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息的示例。如表3所示,一个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括该通信装置的索引、通信装置的星历信息,用于指示该通信装置对应的轨道角度范围的信息。表3中以用于指示该通信装置对应的轨道角度范围的信息包括轨道角度范围的两个边界值为例进行示意。不同通信装置对应的轨道角度范围可以相同,也可以不同。第二通信装置例如为通信装置#1,则第一轨道角度范围为[轨道角度#3,轨道角度#4]。The following table 3 illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or auxiliary communication device, or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device. As shown in Table 3, the information of a communication device (or auxiliary communication device, or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched to) may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and information indicating the orbital angle range corresponding to the communication device. Table 3 illustrates an example where the information indicating the orbital angle range corresponding to the communication device includes two boundary values of the orbital angle range. The orbital angle ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the first orbital angle range is [orbital angle #3, orbital angle #4].
表3候选辅通信装置的信息的示例
Table 3 Examples of information on candidate auxiliary communication devices
终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括各个通信装置的优先级的信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。表3中示例出了终端装置获取的通信装置的信息的部分内容,终端装置还可以获取通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的其他信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。The terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information for each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 3 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
实施方式A1.3,以第一信息包括/为时间信息为例,第一条件包括:第一信息中的时间信息指示的时间(例如当前时间)属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段。In implementation method A1.3, taking the first information as time information as an example, the first condition includes: the time indicated by the time information in the first information (e.g., the current time) belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area.
终端装置可以获取第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段。如果终端装置确定第一信息中的时间信息指示的时间(例如当前时间)属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段,则终端装置可以确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。如果终端装置确定第一信息中的时间信息指示的时间(例如当前时间)不属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段,则终端装置可以确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。The terminal device can obtain the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area. If the terminal device determines that the time indicated by the time information in the first information (e.g., the current time) belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area, then the terminal device can determine that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. If the terminal device determines that the time indicated by the time information in the first information (e.g., the current time) does not belong to the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area, then the terminal device can determine that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段的信息可以是预先配置在终端装置侧的,或者是协议定义的,或者是其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)发送的。Information regarding the time period during which the second communication device provides services to the first area may be pre-configured on the terminal device side, defined by a protocol, or sent by other communication devices (such as a third communication device).
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息,这些辅通信装置可以作为待切换的辅通信装置,第二通信装置属于该多个辅通信装置。终端装置基于这些通信装置的信息判断该通信装置是否为第一区域提供服务。In one possible implementation, the terminal device can acquire information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched over), which can serve as auxiliary communication devices to be switched over, and the second communication device belongs to these multiple auxiliary communication devices. Based on the information from these communication devices, the terminal device determines whether the communication device provides service to the first area.
下面通过表4示例性示出一种终端装置获取的通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息的示例。如表4所示,一个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括该通信装置的索引、通信装置的星历信息,通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段的信息。不同通信装置对应的为第一区域提供服务的时间段可以相同,也可以不同。第二通信装置例如为通信装置#1,则第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段为[t2,t3]。Table 4 below illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) obtained by a terminal device. As shown in Table 4, the information of a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and the time period during which the communication device provides service to the first area. The time periods during which different communication devices provide service to the first area may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area is [t2, t3].
表4候选辅通信装置的信息的示例
Table 4 Examples of information on candidate auxiliary communication devices
一种可能的实施方式中,表4提供的示例中,t1与t2相等,t3与t4相等。终端装置可以在时刻t0将通信装置#0作为自身的辅通信装置,在时刻t1(或时刻t1前后)从通信装置#0切换至通信装置#1(将通信装置#1作为自身的辅通信装置,通信装置#0不再作为终端装置的辅通信装置),在时刻t3(或时刻t3前后)从通信装置#1切换至通信装置#2(将通信装置#2作为自身的辅通信装置,通信装置#1不再作为终端装置的辅通信装置)。In one possible implementation, as shown in the example provided in Table 4, t1 is equal to t2, and t3 is equal to t4. The terminal device can use communication device #0 as its auxiliary communication device at time t0, switch from communication device #0 to communication device #1 at time t1 (or around time t1) (using communication device #1 as its auxiliary communication device, and communication device #0 no longer serving as an auxiliary communication device for the terminal device), and switch from communication device #1 to communication device #2 at time t3 (or around time t3) (using communication device #2 as its auxiliary communication device, and communication device #1 no longer serving as an auxiliary communication device for the terminal device).
终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括各个通信装置的优先级的信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。表4中示例出了终端装置获取的通信装置的信息的部分内容,终端装置还可以获取通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的其他信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。The terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (also called auxiliary communication devices, candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information of each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 4 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
实施方式A1.4,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置的对应的多普勒为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围。In implementation method A1.4, taking the first information as the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler range.
图5示例性示出了一种通信装置的信号对应的多普勒和多普勒率的示意图。图5中横轴表示经度,纵轴表示纬度,虚线表示多普勒(Doppler)等高线图,即位于同一条虚线上的两个位置所接收到的该通信装置的信号的多普勒的值是相等的,位于不同虚线上的两个位置所接收到的该通信装置的信号的多普勒的值是不相等的。图5中实线表示多普勒(Doppler)变化率等高线图,即位于同一条虚线上的两个位置所接收到的该通信装置的信号的多普勒变化率是相等的,位于不同虚线上的两个位置所接收到的该通信装置的信号的多普勒变化率是不相等的。Figure 5 illustrates a schematic diagram of Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the signal of a communication device. In Figure 5, the horizontal axis represents longitude, the vertical axis represents latitude, and the dashed lines represent Doppler contour maps. That is, the Doppler values of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on the same dashed line are equal, while the Doppler values of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on different dashed lines are unequal. In Figure 5, the solid lines represent Doppler rate of change contour maps. That is, the Doppler rate of change of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on the same dashed line is equal, while the Doppler rate of change of the signal received by the communication device at two locations located on different dashed lines is unequal.
从图5可以看出,通信装置与终端装置的之间的距离会影响终端装置接收到的来自通信装置的信号的多普勒的值。例如在波位#1和波位#2所接收到的来自同一个通信装置的信号的多普勒的值不同。另一方面,随着通信装置的移动,针对波位#1,该波位#1所接收到的信号的多普勒的值也会发生移动。即随着通信装置的移动,同一个区域所收到的该通信装置的信号的多普勒的值也会发生变化。As shown in Figure 5, the distance between the communication device and the terminal device affects the Doppler value of the signal received by the terminal device from the communication device. For example, the Doppler values of the signals received from the same communication device at wave positions #1 and #2 are different. On the other hand, as the communication device moves, the Doppler value of the signal received at wave position #1 also shifts. That is, as the communication device moves, the Doppler value of the signal received from the communication device in the same area also changes.
本申请实施例中,一个通信装置可以对应一个多普勒范围。例如第二通信装置可以对应第一多普勒范围,当第二通信装置的信号对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如当第二通信装置的信号对应的多普勒不属于第一多普勒范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In this embodiment, a communication device can correspond to a Doppler range. For example, a second communication device can correspond to a first Doppler range. When the Doppler signal of the second communication device corresponds to the first Doppler range, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. Conversely, when the Doppler signal of the second communication device does not correspond to the first Doppler range, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的多普勒的方式有多种。例如,终端装置接收来自第二通信装置的信号,根据该信号得到第二通信装置的信号对应的多普勒。又例如,终端装置获取第二通信装置的位置和/或运动速度信息(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定第二通信装置的位置和/或运动速度信息)以及终端装置的位置,继而根据这些信息确定第二通信装置对应的多普勒。又例如,终端装置根据第二通信装置和终端装置的运动关系(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定)计算第二通信装置对应的多普勒。又例如,终端装置接收来自第二通信装置的参考信号(例如,解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)、相位追踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PTRS)、同步信号和PBCH块(synchronization signal and PBCH block,SSB)、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)等),通过检测该参考信号得到第二通信装置的信号对应的多普勒。There are several ways for a terminal device to obtain the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the terminal device receives a signal from the second communication device and obtains the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device based on that signal. Another example is that the terminal device obtains the position and/or velocity information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the position and/or velocity information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the position of the terminal device, and then determines the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device based on this information. Yet another example is that the terminal device calculates the Doppler signal corresponding to the second communication device based on the motion relationship between the second communication device and the terminal device (e.g., determined based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device). For example, the terminal device receives a reference signal from the second communication device (e.g., demodulation reference signal (DMRS), phase tracking reference signal (PTRS), synchronization signal and PBCH block (SSB), channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.), and obtains the Doppler corresponding to the signal of the second communication device by detecting the reference signal.
终端装置获取第一多普勒范围的方式可以参照前述获取第一仰角范围的相关实施方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The terminal device can obtain the first Doppler range by referring to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, which is similar and will not be repeated here.
下面通过表5示例性示出一种终端装置获取的通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息的示例。如表5所示,一个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括该通信装置的索引、通信装置的星历信息,通信装置对应的多普勒范围。不同通信装置对应的多普勒范围可以相同,也可以不同。第二通信装置例如为通信装置#1,则第二通信装置对应的多普勒范围(即第一多普勒范围)为[Doppler3,Doppler4]。Table 5 below illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device. As shown in Table 5, the information of a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and the Doppler range corresponding to the communication device. The Doppler ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the Doppler range corresponding to the second communication device (i.e., the first Doppler range) is [Doppler3, Doppler4].
表5候选辅通信装置的信息的示例
Table 5 Examples of information on candidate auxiliary communication devices
终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括各个通信装置的优先级的信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。表5中示例出了终端装置获取的通信装置的信息的部分内容,终端装置还可以获取通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的其他信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。The terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information for each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 5 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
实施方式A1.5,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置的对应的多普勒率为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围。In implementation method A1.5, taking the first information as the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range.
终端装置确定的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率可以为一段时间内多普勒值的变化率。多普勒变化率的相关内容可以参见前述图5的介绍,不再赘述。多普勒率可以替换为多普勒变化率。终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的多普勒率的方式有多种。例如,终端装置先后获取了两个多普勒的值,之后计算该段时间内的多普勒的变化率。例如终端装置将该两个多普勒的值的差值除以该段时间的时长,得到多普勒率。又例如,终端装置获取第二通信装置的运动轨迹和/或运动速度信息(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定第二通信装置的运动轨迹和/或运动速度信息)以及终端装置的位置,继而根据这些信息确定第二通信装置对应的多普勒率。The Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device determined by the terminal device can be the rate of change of Doppler values over a period of time. For details on the rate of change of Doppler values, please refer to Figure 5 above; it will not be repeated here. The term "Doppler rate" can be replaced with "rate of change of Doppler values." There are several ways for the terminal device to obtain the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the terminal device may acquire two Doppler values sequentially and then calculate the rate of change of Doppler values over that period. For instance, the terminal device may divide the difference between the two Doppler values by the duration of that period to obtain the Doppler rate. Another example is that the terminal device may acquire the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the position of the terminal device, and then determine the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
本申请实施例中,一个通信装置可以对应一个多普勒率范围。例如第二通信装置可以对应第一多普勒率范围,当第二通信装置的信号对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如当第二通信装置的信号对应的多普勒率不属于第一多普勒率范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In this embodiment, a communication device can correspond to a Doppler rate range. For example, a second communication device can correspond to a first Doppler rate range. When the Doppler rate corresponding to the signal of the second communication device belongs to the first Doppler rate range, the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device includes the first area. Conversely, when the Doppler rate corresponding to the signal of the second communication device does not belong to the first Doppler rate range, the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device does not include the first area.
终端装置获取第一多普勒率范围的方式可以参照前述获取第一仰角范围的相关实施方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The method by which the terminal device obtains the first Doppler rate range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
下面通过表6示例性示出一种终端装置获取的通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息的示例。如表6所示,一个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括该通信装置的索引、通信装置的星历信息,通信装置对应的多普勒率范围。不同通信装置对应的多普勒率范围可以相同,也可以不同。第二通信装置例如为通信装置#1,则第二通信装置对应的多普勒率范围(即第一多普勒率范围)为[Doppler_rate3,Doppler_rate4]。Table 6 below illustrates an example of information about a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) acquired by a terminal device. As shown in Table 6, the information of a communication device (or secondary communication device, or candidate secondary communication device, or secondary communication device to be switched to) may include the index of the communication device, the ephemeris information of the communication device, and the Doppler rate range corresponding to the communication device. The Doppler rate ranges corresponding to different communication devices may be the same or different. For example, if the second communication device is communication device #1, then the Doppler rate range corresponding to the second communication device (i.e., the first Doppler rate range) is [Doppler_rate3, Doppler_rate4].
表6候选辅通信装置的信息的示例
Table 6 Examples of information on candidate auxiliary communication devices
终端装置可以获取多个通信装置(或称辅通信装置、或称候选辅通信装置,或称待切换的辅通信装置)的信息可以包括各个通信装置的优先级的信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。表6中示例出了终端装置获取的通信装置的信息的部分内容,终端装置还可以获取通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的其他信息,相关内容参见前述实施方式A1.1的相关描述,不再赘述。The terminal device can obtain information about multiple communication devices (or auxiliary communication devices, or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), including priority information for each communication device. For details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here. Table 6 illustrates part of the information about the communication devices obtained by the terminal device. The terminal device can also obtain other information about the communication devices (or candidate auxiliary communication devices, or auxiliary communication devices to be switched to), for details, please refer to the relevant description in Implementation A1.1 above, which will not be repeated here.
实施方式A1.6,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置的对应的TA为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围。In implementation method A1.6, taking the first information as the TA corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the TA corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the first TA.
终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的TA的方式有多种。例如,终端装置可以从接收来自其他通信装置的信令,从该信令中获取第二通信装置的TA。例如,终端装置接收来自第二通信装置的信号,根据该信号得到第二通信装置的信号对应的TA。又例如,终端装置获取第二通信装置的位置(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定第二通信装置的位置)以及终端装置的位置,继而根据该两个位置信息确定第二通信装置对应的TA。又例如,终端装置根据第二通信装置和终端装置的运动关系(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定)计算第二通信装置对应的TA。There are several ways for a terminal device to obtain the TA corresponding to a second communication device. For example, the terminal device can obtain the TA of the second communication device from signaling received from other communication devices. Alternatively, the terminal device can receive a signal from the second communication device and obtain the TA corresponding to that signal. Another example is that the terminal device can obtain the location of the second communication device (e.g., determine the location of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the location of the terminal device, and then determine the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on these two location information. Yet another example is that the terminal device can calculate the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on the motion relationship between the second communication device and the terminal device (e.g., determined based on the ephemeris information of the second communication device).
本申请实施例中,一个通信装置可以对应一个TA范围。例如第二通信装置可以对应第一TA范围,当第二通信装置的信号对应的TA属于第一TA范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如当第二通信装置的信号对应的TA不属于第一TA范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In this embodiment, a communication device can correspond to a TA range. For example, a second communication device can correspond to a first TA range. When the TA corresponding to the signal of the second communication device belongs to the first TA range, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. Conversely, when the TA corresponding to the signal of the second communication device does not belong to the first TA range, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
终端装置获取第一TA范围的方式可以参照前述获取第一仰角范围的相关实施方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The method by which the terminal device obtains the first TA range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
实施方式A1.7,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置的对应的TA变化率为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围。In implementation method A1.7, taking the first information as the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the first TA change rate.
终端装置确定的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率可以为一段时间内TA的变化率。终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的方式有多种。例如,终端装置先后获取了两个TA的值,之后计算该段时间内的TA的变化率。例如终端装置将该两个TA的值的差值除以该段时间的时长,得到TA变化率。终端装置获取第二通信装置的位置和/或运动速度信息(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定第二通信装置的位置和/或运动速度信息)以及终端装置的位置,继而根据这些信息确定第二通信装置对应的TA变化率。The rate of change of the transfer signal (TA) corresponding to the second communication device, determined by the terminal device, can be the rate of change of the TA over a period of time. There are several ways for the terminal device to obtain the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the terminal device may acquire two TA values sequentially and then calculate the rate of change of the TA over that period. Alternatively, the terminal device may divide the difference between the two TA values by the duration of that period to obtain the rate of change of the TA. The terminal device may also acquire the position and/or speed information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the position and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the position of the terminal device, and then determine the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
本申请实施例中,一个通信装置可以对应一个TA变化率范围。例如第二通信装置可以对应第一TA变化率范围,当第二通信装置的信号对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如当第二通信装置的信号对应的TA变化率不属于第一TA变化率范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In this embodiment, a communication device can correspond to a TA change rate range. For example, a second communication device can correspond to a first TA change rate range. When the TA change rate corresponding to the signal of the second communication device belongs to the first TA change rate range, the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device includes the first area. Conversely, when the TA change rate corresponding to the signal of the second communication device does not belong to the first TA change rate range, the terminal device determines that the area provided by the second communication device does not include the first area.
终端装置获取第一TA变化率范围的方式可以参照前述获取第一仰角范围的相关实施方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The method by which the terminal device obtains the first TA change rate range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
实施方式A1.8,以第一信息包括/为第二通信装置的对应的TA变化率的变化率为例,第一条件包括:第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围。In implementation method A1.8, taking the first information as the rate of change of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device as an example, the first condition includes: the rate of change of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the range of the second TA change rate.
终端装置确定的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率可以为一段时间内TA的变化率的变化率。终端装置获取第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率的方式有多种。例如,终端装置先后获取了两个TA的变化率,之后计算该段时间内的TA变化率的变化率。例如终端装置将该两个TA变化率的值的差值除以该段时间的时长,得到TA变化率的变化率。又例如,终端装置获取第二通信装置的运动轨迹和/或运动速度信息(例如根据第二通信装置的星历信息确定第二通信装置的运动轨迹和/或运动速度信息)以及终端装置的位置,继而根据这些信息确定第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率。The rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device, as determined by the terminal device, can be the rate of change of the TA over a period of time. There are several ways for the terminal device to obtain the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device. For example, the terminal device may acquire two TA rates of change sequentially and then calculate the rate of change of the TA over that period. Alternatively, the terminal device may divide the difference between the two TA rates of change by the duration of that period to obtain the rate of change of the TA. Another example is that the terminal device may acquire the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device (e.g., determining the motion trajectory and/or speed information of the second communication device based on its ephemeris information) and the terminal device's position, and then determine the rate of change of the TA corresponding to the second communication device based on this information.
本申请实施例中,一个通信装置可以对应一个TA变化率的变化率范围。例如第二通信装置可以对应第二TA变化率范围,当第二通信装置的信号对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。又例如当第二通信装置的信号对应的TA变化率的变化率不属于第二TA变化率范围,则终端装置确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。In this embodiment, a communication device can correspond to a range of TA change rates. For example, a second communication device can correspond to a second TA change rate range. When the TA change rate corresponding to the signal of the second communication device falls within the second TA change rate range, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area. Conversely, when the TA change rate corresponding to the signal of the second communication device does not fall within the second TA change rate range, the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area.
终端装置获取第二TA变化率范围的方式可以参照前述获取第一仰角范围的相关实施方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The method by which the terminal device obtains the second TA rate of change range can refer to the aforementioned implementation method for obtaining the first elevation angle range, and is similar, so it will not be described again.
实施方式A1.1、实施方式A1.2、实施方式A1.3、实施方式A1.4、实施方式A1.5、实施方式A1.6、实施方式A1.7和实施方式A1.8中的任意多种可以结合使用,例如第一条件也可以为多项内容,第一条件中的所有内容都被满足时,确定第一信息满足第一条件;反之则确定不满足第一条件。例如第一条件为第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围,以及第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围。当第一信息指示的仰角属于第一仰角范围,且第一信息指示的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围,终端装置确定第一信息满足第一条件。当第一信息指示的仰角不属于第一仰角范围,和/或,第一信息指示的轨道角度不属于第一轨道角度范围,终端装置确定第一信息不满足第一条件。其他示例与之类似,不再赘述。Implementation methods A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A1.4, A1.5, A1.6, A1.7, and A1.8 can be used in combination. For example, the first condition can also be multiple items. When all items in the first condition are satisfied, it is determined that the first information satisfies the first condition; otherwise, it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied. For example, the first condition is that the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first elevation angle range, and the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device belongs to the first orbital angle range. When the elevation angle indicated by the first information belongs to the first elevation angle range, and the orbital angle indicated by the first information belongs to the first orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the first information satisfies the first condition. When the elevation angle indicated by the first information does not belong to the first elevation angle range, and/or, the orbital angle indicated by the first information does not belong to the first orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the first information does not satisfy the first condition. Other examples are similar and will not be described in detail.
实施方式A2,终端装置可以基于第一信息(第二通信装置的信息)以及第二信息(第一通信装置的信息)的信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置。In implementation method A2, the terminal device can determine whether it is necessary to switch to the second communication device based on the first information (information of the second communication device) and the second information (information of the first communication device).
一种可能的实施方式中,终端装置可以获取第二信息。第二信息可以包括/为:用于确定第一通信装置提供服务的区域。第二信息可以包括/为:用于确定第一通信装置当前和/或即将(例如第一时长后)提供服务的区域,或用于确定第一通信装置提供服务的区域当前和/或即将(例如第一时长后)是否包括第一区域的信息。例如,终端装置可以根据第二信息是否满足第一条件,确定第一通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。又例如,终端装置可以根据星历信息确定第二通信装置的运动规律,继而根据运动规律以及第二信息,推测出第一时长后第一通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。In one possible implementation, the terminal device can acquire second information. The second information may include/are for determining the area where the first communication device provides services. The second information may include/are for determining the area where the first communication device currently and/or will soon (e.g., after a first duration) provide services, or for determining whether the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or will soon (e.g., after a first duration) include the first area. For example, the terminal device can determine whether the area where the first communication device provides services includes the first area based on whether the second information satisfies a first condition. As another example, the terminal device can determine the motion pattern of the second communication device based on ephemeris information, and then, based on the motion pattern and the second information, infer whether the area where the first communication device provides services after a first duration includes the first area.
本申请实施例中的“即将”可以是指即将到来的时刻,可以是指一段时长后的时间,例如第一时长后的时间。第一时长的值可以是预先设置的,或为协议定义的,或为其他通信装置向终端装置指示的值。第一时长的值可以为正数,例如第一时长为5分钟。In this application's embodiments, "about to" can refer to an upcoming moment, or to a time after a certain duration, such as a time after a first duration. The value of the first duration can be preset, defined by a protocol, or indicated by another communication device to the terminal device. The value of the first duration can be a positive number, for example, the first duration is 5 minutes.
例如,第二信息包括/为:与第一通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第一通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第一通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第一通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第一通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第一通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。For example, the second information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the first communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device), time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device), and information associated with the TA of the first communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the first communication device).
本申请实施例中,第二信息和第一信息可以为两个信息,也可以为同一个信息(例如第一信息和第二信息可以为当前时间)。第一信息和第二信息的类型可以相同也可以不同。例如,第一信息为第二通信装置对应的仰角,第二信息为第一通信装置的仰角、轨道角或当前时间。In this embodiment, the second information and the first information can be two separate pieces of information, or they can be the same piece of information (for example, the first information and the second information can be the current time). The types of the first information and the second information can be the same or different. For example, the first information is the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device, and the second information is the elevation angle, orbital angle, or current time of the first communication device.
例如,终端装置可以根据第二信息判断第一通信装置当前和/或未来(例如在第一时长后)提供服务的区域是否还包括第一区域。若第二信息指示第一通信装置提供服务的区域当前和/或未来(例如在第一时长后)不包括第一区域,则终端装置确定需要切换辅通信装置。若终端装置根据第一信息确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括/为第一区域,则终端装置可以确定待切换的目标辅通信装置为第二通信装置。继而终端装置可以从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置(或将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置)。在实施方式A2中,终端装置根据第一信息确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括/为第一区域的具体实施方式可以参见前述实施方式A1.1、实施方式A1.2、实施方式A1.3、实施方式A1.4、实施方式A1.5、实施方式A1.6、实施方式A1.7和实施方式A1.8中的一种或多种,此处不再赘述。For example, the terminal device can determine, based on the second information, whether the area currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration) still includes the first region. If the second information indicates that the area currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration) does not include the first region, the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the secondary communication device. If the terminal device determines, based on the first information, that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first region, the terminal device can determine that the target secondary communication device to be switched to is the second communication device. The terminal device can then switch from the first communication device to the second communication device (or switch the secondary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device). In embodiment A2, the specific implementation of the terminal device determining that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first region can be found in one or more of the aforementioned embodiments A1.1, A1.2, A1.3, A1.4, A1.5, A1.6, A1.7, and A1.8, and will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的实施方式中,若第二信息指示第一通信装置提供服务的区域未来(例如在第一时长后)仍包括第一区域,则终端装置可以确定还不需要切换辅通信装置,即可以继续与第一通信装置进行通信。In another possible implementation, if the second information indicates that the area served by the first communication device will still include the first area in the future (e.g., after the first duration), the terminal device can determine that there is no need to switch to the auxiliary communication device, that is, it can continue to communicate with the first communication device.
又一种可能的实施方式中,若第二信息指示第一通信装置提供服务的区域当前仍包括第一区域,则终端装置可以确定还不需要切换辅通信装置。或者,若第二信息指示第一通信装置提供服务的区域当前仍包括第一区域,则终端装置结合第二信息判断第一通信装置在未来(例如在第一时长后)是否仍包括第一区域。例如,若第一通信装置在未来(例如在第一时长后)仍包括第一区域,则终端装置可以确定还不需要切换辅通信装置。若第一通信装置在未来(例如在第一时长后)不包括第一区域,则终端装置可以确定需要切换辅通信装置。若终端装置根据第一信息确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括/为第一区域,则终端装置可以确定待切换的目标辅通信装置为第二通信装置。继而终端装置可以从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置(或将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置)。In another possible implementation, if the second information indicates that the area served by the first communication device still includes the first region, the terminal device can determine that switching to the secondary communication device is not yet necessary. Alternatively, if the second information indicates that the area served by the first communication device still includes the first region, the terminal device, in conjunction with the second information, determines whether the first communication device will still include the first region in the future (e.g., after the first duration). For example, if the first communication device will still include the first region in the future (e.g., after the first duration), the terminal device can determine that switching to the secondary communication device is not yet necessary. If the first communication device will not include the first region in the future (e.g., after the first duration), the terminal device can determine that switching to the secondary communication device is necessary. If the terminal device determines, based on the first information, that the area served by the second communication device includes/is the first region, the terminal device can determine that the target secondary communication device to be switched to is the second communication device. The terminal device can then switch from the first communication device to the second communication device (or switch the secondary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device).
该实施方式中,终端装置可以在第一通信装置当前无法为终端装置提供的服务的情况下查找下一个可用的辅通信装置,或者终端装置可以在第一通信装置即将无法为终端装置提供的服务的情况下查找下一个可用的辅通信装置,继而切换辅通信装置。该方案可以尽可能的延长辅通信装置的使用时长,从而可以减少辅通信装置切换的数量,从而避免过于频繁的切换,从而节省资源开销。In this embodiment, the terminal device can search for the next available secondary communication device when the first communication device is currently unable to provide service, or when the first communication device is about to become unavailable, and then switch to the secondary communication device. This approach can extend the usage time of the secondary communication device as much as possible, thereby reducing the number of secondary communication device switches and avoiding overly frequent switches, thus saving resource consumption.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二信息可以用于指示当前第一通信装置提供服务的区域。例如,第二信息可以包括/为当前的第一通信装置的仰角、轨道角度、多普勒、多普勒率、TA、TA变化率、TA变化率的变化率,以及当前的时间中的至少一项。例如,终端装置可以根据终端装置的位置信息以及第一通信装置的位置信息获取第二信息。或者,终端装置根据接收到的来自第一通信装置的信号确定第二信息。或者,终端装置根据接收到的来自其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)的信息确定第二信息。终端装置获取第二信息的方式可以参见前述获取第一信息的方式。In one possible implementation, the second information can be used to indicate the area currently being served by the first communication device. For example, the second information may include/be at least one of the following: the elevation angle, orbital angle, Doppler, Doppler rate, TA, rate of change of TA, rate of change of the rate of change of TA, and the current time. For example, the terminal device can obtain the second information based on the location information of both the terminal device and the first communication device. Alternatively, the terminal device can determine the second information based on signals received from the first communication device. Alternatively, the terminal device can determine the second information based on information received from other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device). The method by which the terminal device obtains the second information can refer to the aforementioned method of obtaining the first information.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第二信息可以用于指示未来的(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域。例如,第二信息可以包括/为未来的(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置的仰角、轨道角度、多普勒、多普勒率、TA、TA变化率、TA变化率的变化率,以及当前的时间中的至少一项。例如,终端装置可以基于第一通信装置的星历信息(和/或运动轨迹),以及终端装置的位置信息(和/或运动轨迹)推测出在未来(例如第一时长之后)的第二信息。举个例子,终端装置根据当前第一通信装置的仰角(或轨道角度、或多普勒、或多普勒率、或TA、或TA变化率、或TA变化率的变化率)以及第一通信装置的星历信息,推测出未来(例如第一时长之后)第一通信装置的仰角(或轨道角度、或多普勒、或多普勒率、或TA、或TA变化率、或TA变化率的变化率),第二信息指示的第一通信装置的仰角可以理解为未来(例如第一时长之后)第一通信装置的仰角(或轨道角度、或多普勒、或多普勒率、或TA、或TA变化率、或TA变化率的变化率)。In another possible implementation, the second information can be used to indicate the area where the first communication device will provide service in the future (e.g., after the first duration). For example, the second information may include/be for at least one of the following: the elevation angle, orbital angle, Doppler, Doppler rate, TA, rate of change of TA, rate of change of the rate of change of TA, and the current time of the first communication device in the future (e.g., after the first duration). For example, the terminal device may infer the second information in the future (e.g., after the first duration) based on the ephemeris information (and/or motion trajectory) of the first communication device and the location information (and/or motion trajectory) of the terminal device. For example, based on the current elevation angle (or orbital angle, or Doppler, or Doppler rate, or TA, or TA rate of change, or rate of change of TA rate of change) of the first communication device and the ephemeris information of the first communication device, the terminal device predicts the future (e.g., after a first duration) elevation angle (or orbital angle, or Doppler, or Doppler rate, or TA, or TA rate of change, or rate of change of TA rate of change) of the first communication device. The elevation angle of the first communication device indicated by the second information can be understood as the future (e.g., after a first duration) elevation angle (or orbital angle, or Doppler, or Doppler rate, or TA, or TA rate of change, or rate of change of TA rate of change) of the first communication device.
终端装置基于第二信息判断第一通信装置当前或即将(例如第一时长之后)提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的方式也有多种。当第二信息用于确定当前第一通信装置提供服务的区域的情况下,终端装置可以基于第二信息确定出当前第一通信装置提供服务的区域,也可以基于第二信息以及第一通信装置的星历信息,推测出未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域。当第二信息用于确定未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域的情况下,终端装置可以基于第二信息确定出未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域。There are several ways for the terminal device to determine whether the area currently or soon (e.g., after a first duration) of service provided by the first communication device includes the first region, based on the second information. When the second information is used to determine the area currently being provided by the first communication device, the terminal device can determine the area currently being provided by the first communication device based on the second information, or it can infer the area to be provided by the first communication device in the future (e.g., after a first duration) based on the second information and the ephemeris information of the first communication device. When the second information is used to determine the area to be provided by the first communication device in the future (e.g., after a first duration), the terminal device can determine the area to be provided by the first communication device in the future (e.g., after a first duration) based on the second information.
例如,终端装置在第二信息无法满足第二条件的情况下,确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。又例如,终端装置在第二信息满足第二条件的情况下,确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。For example, if the second information fails to meet the second condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area. As another example, if the second information meets the second condition, the terminal device determines that the area served by the first communication device indicated by the second information includes the first area.
例如第二条件可以包括以下一项或多项:For example, the second condition may include one or more of the following:
第一通信装置对应的仰角属于第二仰角范围;The elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the second elevation angle;
第一通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第二轨道角度范围;The orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the second orbital angle.
时间信息指示的时间属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;The time indicated by the time information belongs to the time period during which the first communication device provides services to the first area;
第一通信装置对应的多普勒属于第二多普勒范围;The Doppler range corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the second Doppler range;
第一通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第二多普勒率范围;The Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the second Doppler rate.
第一通信装置对应的TA属于第二TA范围;The TA corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the range of the second TA;
第一通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第三TA变化率范围;The TA change rate corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the third TA change rate.
第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第四TA变化率范围。The rate of change of the TA corresponding to the first communication device falls within the range of the fourth TA rate of change.
举个例子,第二条件为第一通信装置对应的仰角属于第二仰角范围。当第二信息指示的仰角(该仰角可能是当前的第一通信装置的仰角,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的仰角)不属于第二仰角范围,则终端装置确定第二信息无法满足第二条件。当第二信息指示的仰角(该仰角可能是当前的第一通信装置的仰角,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的仰角)属于第二仰角范围,则终端装置确定第二信息满足第二条件。For example, the second condition is that the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the second elevation angle range. If the elevation angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current elevation angle of the first communication device or the elevation angle of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the second elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. If the elevation angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current elevation angle of the first communication device or the elevation angle of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the second elevation angle range, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
再举个例子,第二条件为第一通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第二轨道角度范围。当第二信息指示的轨道角度(该轨道角度可能是当前的第一通信装置的轨道角度,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的轨道角度)不属于第二轨道角度范围,则终端装置确定第二信息无法满足第二条件。当第二信息指示的轨道角度(该轨道角度可能是当前的第一通信装置的轨道角度,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的轨道角度)属于第二轨道角度范围,则终端装置确定第二信息满足第二条件。For another example, the second condition is that the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the range of the second orbital angle. If the orbital angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current orbital angle of the first communication device or the orbital angle of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the range of the second orbital angle, the terminal device determines that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. If the orbital angle indicated by the second information (which may be the current orbital angle of the first communication device or the orbital angle of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the range of the second orbital angle, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
再举个例子,第二条件为第二信息指示的时间(可能是当前时间,也可能是第一时长后的时间)属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段。当第二信息指示的时间(可能是当前时间,也可能是第一时长后的时间)不属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段,则终端装置确定第二信息无法满足第二条件。当第二信息指示的时间(可能是当前时间,也可能是第一时长后的时间)属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段,则终端装置确定第二信息满足第二条件。For another example, the second condition is that the time indicated by the second information (which could be the current time or a time after the first duration) falls within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area. If the time indicated by the second information (which could be the current time or a time after the first duration) does not fall within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area, then the terminal device determines that the second information does not satisfy the second condition. If the time indicated by the second information (which could be the current time or a time after the first duration) falls within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area, then the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
再举个例子,第二条件为第一通信装置对应的多普勒属于第二多普勒范围。当第二信息指示的多普勒(该多普勒可能是当前的第一通信装置的多普勒,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的多普勒)不属于第二多普勒范围,则终端装置确定第二信息无法满足第二条件。当第二信息指示的多普勒(该多普勒可能是当前的第一通信装置的多普勒,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的多普勒)属于第二多普勒范围,则终端装置确定第二信息满足第二条件。For another example, the second condition is that the Doppler signal corresponding to the first communication device belongs to the second Doppler range. If the Doppler signal indicated by the second information (which could be the current Doppler signal of the first communication device or the Doppler signal of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the second Doppler range, the terminal device determines that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. If the Doppler signal indicated by the second information (which could be the current Doppler signal of the first communication device or the Doppler signal of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the second Doppler range, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
第二条件也可以为多项内容,第二条件中的所有内容都被满足时,确定第二信息满足第一条件;反之则确定不满足第二条件。例如第二条件为第一通信装置对应的仰角属于第二仰角范围,以及第一通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第二轨道角度范围。当第二信息指示的仰角(该仰角可能是当前的第一通信装置的仰角,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的仰角)不属于第二仰角范围,和/或,第二信息指示的轨道角度(该轨道角度可能是当前的第一通信装置的轨道角度,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的轨道角度)不属于第二轨道角度范围,终端装置确定第二信息不满足第二条件。当第二信息指示的仰角(该仰角可能是当前的第一通信装置的仰角,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的仰角)属于第二仰角范围,且第二信息指示的轨道角度(该轨道角度可能是当前的第一通信装置的轨道角度,或者为第一时长后第一通信装置的轨道角度)属于第二轨道角度范围,终端装置确定第二信息满足第二条件。The second condition can also include multiple conditions. If all conditions are met, the second information is determined to satisfy the first condition; otherwise, it is determined not to satisfy the second condition. For example, the second condition could be that the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second elevation angle range, and the orbital angle corresponding to the first communication device belongs to a second orbital angle range. When the elevation angle indicated by the second information (which could be the current elevation angle of the first communication device or the elevation angle of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the second elevation angle range, and/or, the orbital angle indicated by the second information (which could be the current orbital angle of the first communication device or the orbital angle of the first communication device after a first duration) does not belong to the second orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the second information does not satisfy the second condition. When the elevation angle indicated by the second information (which could be the current elevation angle of the first communication device or the elevation angle of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the second elevation angle range, and the orbital angle indicated by the second information (which could be the current orbital angle of the first communication device or the orbital angle of the first communication device after a first duration) belongs to the second orbital angle range, the terminal device determines that the second information satisfies the second condition.
第二条件为其他内容的示例可以参见前述示例,还可以参见前述终端装置判断第一信息是否满足第一条件的相关内容,不再赘述。Examples of other conditions can be found in the aforementioned examples, as well as in the aforementioned content regarding the terminal device's determination of whether the first information meets the first condition, which will not be repeated here.
步骤202,第二通信装置发送同步信号。Step 202: The second communication device sends a synchronization signal.
相对应的,终端装置接收同步信号。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the synchronization signal.
步骤202中的“终端装置接收同步信号”与“终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置”可以互相替换。终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置可以包括/替换为:终端装置选择第二通信装置为辅通信装置,第一通信装置不再作为终端装置的辅通信装置。或者,终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置可以包括/替换为:终端装置与第二通信装置建立下行定时同步,终端装置不再维护第一通信装置的下行定时同步(或不与第一通信装置建立下行定时同步)。或者,终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置可以包括/替换为:终端装置检测第二通信装置的同步信号,终端装置不再检测第一通信装置的同步信号。In step 202, "the terminal device receives a synchronization signal" and "the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device" can be interchanged. Switching from the first communication device to the second communication device can include/be replaced by: the terminal device selecting the second communication device as the auxiliary communication device, and the first communication device no longer serving as the auxiliary communication device. Alternatively, switching from the first communication device to the second communication device can include/be replaced by: the terminal device establishing downlink timing synchronization with the second communication device, and the terminal device no longer maintaining the downlink timing synchronization of the first communication device (or not establishing downlink timing synchronization with the first communication device). Alternatively, switching from the first communication device to the second communication device can include/be replaced by: the terminal device detecting the synchronization signal of the second communication device, and the terminal device no longer detecting the synchronization signal of the first communication device.
步骤202还可以替换为:终端装置在第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。Step 202 can also be replaced by: the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device when the first information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
或者,步骤202还也可以替换为:终端装置在第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域,第二信息指示第一通信装置当前和/或第一时长后提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下,从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。Alternatively, step 202 can also be replaced by: the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device when the first information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, and the second information indicates that the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or after the first duration does not include the first area.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置在确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换为第二通信装置的情况下,第二通信装置为终端装置所在区域发送同步信号,或者说第二通信装置开始以一个较短的时长(例如第二时长)为周期周期性向第一区域(终端装置所在区域)发送同步信号。进一步,当后续第二通信装置在确定终端装置将不再使用第二通信装置作为辅通信装置的情况下,第二通信装置可以停止以一个较短的时长(例如第二时长)为周期周期性向第一区域(终端装置所在区域)发送同步信号(例如第二通信装置可以停止向第一区域发送同步信号,或以一个较长的时长(例如第三时长,第三时长大于第二时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号)。由于该实施方式中,第二通信装置不会一直以较短的时长(例如第二时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,因此可以节省资源开销,而且也可以减少通信系统中的干扰。In one possible implementation, when the second communication device determines that the terminal device needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device, the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the area where the terminal device is located. In other words, the second communication device begins periodically sending the synchronization signal to the first area (the area where the terminal device is located) at a shorter duration (e.g., a second duration). Further, when the second communication device subsequently determines that the terminal device will no longer use the second communication device as the auxiliary communication device, the second communication device can stop periodically sending the synchronization signal to the first area (the area where the terminal device is located) at a shorter duration (e.g., the second duration). (For example, the second communication device can stop sending the synchronization signal to the first area altogether, or periodically send the synchronization signal to the first area at a longer duration (e.g., a third duration, the third duration being longer than the second duration). Because in this implementation, the second communication device does not continuously periodically send the synchronization signal to the first area at a shorter duration (e.g., the second duration), resource consumption can be saved, and interference in the communication system can be reduced.
步骤203,第三通信装置在第一资源向终端装置发送第二数据。Step 203: The third communication device sends the second data to the terminal device from the first resource.
步骤204,第二通信装置在第一资源向终端装置发送第一数据。Step 204: The second communication device sends the first data to the terminal device from the first resource.
相对应的,终端装置在第一资源上接收第一数据和第二数据。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives first data and second data on the first resource.
本申请实施例中,主通信装置(例如第三通信装置)和一个或多个辅通信装置(例如第二通信装置)可以在相同的资源(时域资源和/或频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据。其中,主通信装置和一个或多个辅通信装置中的任意两个通信装置向终端装置发送的数据可以相同或不同。本申请实施例中以第三通信装置和第二通信装置在相同的资源上向终端装置发送数据为例进行介绍。In this embodiment, a primary communication device (e.g., a third communication device) and one or more secondary communication devices (e.g., a second communication device) can transmit data to a terminal device on the same resources (time-domain resources and/or frequency-domain resources). The data transmitted to the terminal device by any two of the primary and secondary communication devices can be the same or different. This embodiment uses the example of a third communication device and a second communication device transmitting data to the terminal device on the same resources.
在步骤203和步骤204中,由于第一数据和第二数据的资源相同,因此终端装置接收到的是第一数据和第二数据的叠加数据。第一数据来自第二通信装置,第二数据来自第三通信装置。第一资源用于第二通信装置发送第一数据,第一数据占用第一资源。第一资源也用于第三通信装置发送第二数据,第二数据占用第一资源。第一数据和第二数据可以是相同的数据,也可以是不同的数据。或者,第一数据和第二数据可以携带相同信息,也可以携带不同的信息。In steps 203 and 204, since the resources for the first data and the second data are the same, the terminal device receives superimposed data of the first data and the second data. The first data comes from the second communication device, and the second data comes from the third communication device. The first resource is used by the second communication device to send the first data, and the first data occupies the first resource. The first resource is also used by the third communication device to send the second data, and the second data occupies the first resource. The first data and the second data can be the same data or different data. Alternatively, the first data and the second data can carry the same information or different information.
一种可能的实施方式中,第一资源可以包括时域资源和频域资源,第一数据和第二数据的时域资源相同,频域资源相同。又一种可能的实施方式中,第一资源可以包括时域资源,该实施方式中第一数据和第二数据的时域资源相同,频域资源相同或不同。又一种可能的实施方式中,第一资源可以包括频域资源,该实施方式中,第一数据和第二数据的频域资源相同,时域资源相同或不同。In one possible implementation, the first resource may include time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources, with the first data and the second data having the same time-domain resources and the same frequency-domain resources. In another possible implementation, the first resource may include time-domain resources, where the first data and the second data have the same time-domain resources, and their frequency-domain resources may be the same or different. In yet another possible implementation, the first resource may include frequency-domain resources, where the first data and the second data have the same frequency-domain resources, and their time-domain resources may be the same or different.
步骤205,终端装置获取第一数据和第二数据。Step 205: The terminal device acquires the first data and the second data.
在步骤205中,终端装置从接收到的第一数据和第二数据对应的叠加信号中获取第一数据和第二数据。In step 205, the terminal device obtains the first data and the second data from the superimposed signal corresponding to the received first data and the second data.
通过图2提供的方案可以看出,终端装置可以基于第一信息(或第一信息和第二信息)实现辅卫星装置的切换,该过程中无需其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)下发切换指令,因此该方案可以节省信令开销。As can be seen from the scheme provided in Figure 2, the terminal device can switch the auxiliary satellite device based on the first information (or the first information and the second information). During this process, no other communication device (such as a third communication device) needs to issue a switching command, so this scheme can save signaling overhead.
在图2提供的方案中,在步骤201之后还包括一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息可能指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。这种情况下,终端装置可以继续检测其他通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域,例如若第四通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域,则终端装置可以从第一通信装置切换至第四通信装置。In the scheme provided in Figure 2, following step 201, another possible implementation includes the first information indicating that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area. In this case, the terminal device can continue to detect whether the area served by other communication devices includes the first area. For example, if the area served by the fourth communication device includes the first area, the terminal device can switch from the first communication device to the fourth communication device.
在图2提供的方案中,例如,第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的定时(或下行定时)之间的差值可以小于第一阈值,也可以等于第一阈值,也可以大于第一阈值。又例如,第二数据对应的定时(或下行定时)与第一数据对应的下行定时之间的差值可以小于第一阈值,也可以等于第一阈值,也可以大于第一阈值。In the scheme provided in Figure 2, for example, the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the timing (or downlink timing) corresponding to the second communication device can be less than, equal to, or greater than the first threshold. Similarly, the difference between the timing (or downlink timing) corresponding to the second data and the downlink timing corresponding to the first data can be less than, equal to, or greater than the first threshold.
本申请实施例中的定时可以替换为下行定时、下行同步定时、时间(time)同步或下行时间同步。下行定时的英文可以称为downlink timing。下行定时用于使终端装置确定通信装置发送的帧的帧边界、子帧边界、时隙边界、符号边界,或接收窗口位置。例如,第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值也可以替换/包括:第三通信装置和第二通信装置的下行定时差、第三通信装置和第二通信装置的下行的帧的帧边界的差值、下行定时差、同步位置差、时间差、下行时间差、接收到的信号的时间差等。又例如,第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值也可以替换/包括:终端接收到分别来自第三通信装置和第二通信装置数据的下行定时差、终端接收到分别来自第三通信装置和第二通信装置数据的下行的帧的帧边界的差值、下行定时差、同步位置差、时间差、下行时间差、接收到的信号的时间差等。又例如,第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值也可以替换/包括:终端装置收到的分别来自第三通信装置和第二通信装置的两个下行信号的相同帧号的帧边界的时间差、相同时隙号的时隙边界的时间差,或相同符号索引号的符号边界的时间差。In this application embodiment, the timing can be replaced by downlink timing, downlink synchronization timing, time synchronization, or downlink time synchronization. Downlink timing is also known as downlink timing. Downlink timing is used to enable the terminal device to determine the frame boundaries, subframe boundaries, time slot boundaries, symbol boundaries, or receive window positions of frames transmitted by the communication device. For example, the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device can also be replaced by/include: the downlink timing difference between the third and second communication devices, the difference in frame boundaries of downlink frames from the third and second communication devices, downlink timing difference, synchronization position difference, time difference, downlink time difference, and the time difference of the received signal, etc. As another example, the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third and second communication devices can also be replaced by/include: the downlink timing difference when the terminal receives data from the third and second communication devices respectively, the difference in frame boundaries of downlink frames from the third and second communication devices respectively, downlink timing difference, synchronization position difference, time difference, downlink time difference, and the time difference of the received signal, etc. For example, the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device can also be replaced by/included as: the time difference of the frame boundary of the same frame number of the two downlink signals received by the terminal device from the third communication device and the second communication device respectively, the time difference of the time slot boundary of the same time slot number, or the time difference of the symbol boundary of the same symbol index number.
第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值可能是一个变量,该差值可能与第三通信装置和第二通信装置的数据传输时延的差关联。该第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值可能等于或不等于第三通信装置和第二通信装置的数据传输时延的差。The difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device may be a variable, which may be related to the difference in data transmission delay between the third and second communication devices. This difference may or may not be equal to the difference in data transmission delay between the third and second communication devices.
图6示例性示出了本申请实施例提供一种可能的多个通信装置传输的信息的到达终端装置的示意图。如图6所示,第三通信装置向终端装置发送的数据包括S1和S2。第二通信装置向终端装置发送的数据包括S3。第三通信装置发送的数据到达终端装置的时间为t0,第二通信装置发送的数据到达终端装置的时间为(t0+t1)。t1为第三通信装置和第二通信装置发送的数据到达终端装置的时间差,t1也可以理解为第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值。t1可能小于或等于第一阈值,也可能大于第一阈值。Figure 6 exemplarily illustrates a schematic diagram of the arrival of information transmitted by multiple communication devices to a terminal device according to an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 6, the data sent by the third communication device to the terminal device includes S1 and S2. The data sent by the second communication device to the terminal device includes S3. The arrival time of the data sent by the third communication device to the terminal device is t0 , and the arrival time of the data sent by the second communication device to the terminal device is ( t0 + t1 ). t1 is the time difference between the arrival times of the data sent by the third and second communication devices to the terminal device. t1 can also be understood as the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device. t1 may be less than or equal to a first threshold, or it may be greater than the first threshold.
第三通信装置对应的下行定时与第二通信装置对应的下行定时之间的差值大于第一阈值的情况下,终端装置为了消除信号间的干扰可能需要较为复杂的方案。为了降低终端装置侧获取数据的复杂度,本申请实施例提供一种数据处理方式。结合图6举个例子,图7示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种可能的终端装置获取数据的方法流程示意图。请参阅图7,该过程可以包括如下步骤。When the difference between the downlink timing corresponding to the third communication device and the downlink timing corresponding to the second communication device exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device may require a more complex solution to eliminate interference between signals. To reduce the complexity of data acquisition on the terminal device side, embodiments of this application provide a data processing method. Referring to Figure 6 as an example, Figure 7 exemplarily illustrates a possible flowchart of a terminal device data acquisition method provided by an embodiment of this application. Referring to Figure 7, the process may include the following steps.
(1)第三通信装置发送的第二数据经过第三通信装置对应的信道到达终端装置,第二通信装置发送的第一数据经过第二通信装置对应的信道到达终端装置,第一数据和第二数据占用同样的资源。终端装置接收到第一数据和第二数据对应的叠加信号。终端装置从接收到的信号中解码出第二数据(例如S1和S2)。(1) The second data sent by the third communication device arrives at the terminal device through the channel corresponding to the third communication device, and the first data sent by the second communication device arrives at the terminal device through the channel corresponding to the second communication device. The first data and the second data occupy the same resources. The terminal device receives the superimposed signal corresponding to the first data and the second data. The terminal device decodes the second data (e.g., S1 and S2) from the received signal.
(2)终端装置基于第二数据和信道对信号的影响情况,得到受到信道影响的第二数据。例如终端装置根据信号S1与S2的译码结果,对信号进行重构,得到受信道影响的S1和S2,受信道影响的S1和S2例如为(S1*h1+S2*h2)。其中h1与h2表示信道对信号的影响。(2) The terminal device obtains the second data affected by the channel based on the second data and the influence of the channel on the signal. For example, the terminal device reconstructs the signal according to the decoding results of signals S1 and S2 to obtain S1 and S2 affected by the channel. The S1 and S2 affected by the channel are, for example, (S1*h1+S2*h2). Where h1 and h2 represent the influence of the channel on the signal.
(3)终端装置从接收到第一数据和第二数据对应的叠加信号中去除受到信道影响的第二数据,再从得到的数据中得到第一数据(例如S3)。例如,终端装置使用接收到的两个通信装置的叠加信号减去恢复的(S1*h1+S2*h2),得到第一数据。该过程可以理解为串行干扰消除(successive interference cancellation,SIC)信号处理方式。(3) The terminal device removes the second data affected by the channel from the superimposed signal corresponding to the first data and the second data received, and then obtains the first data from the obtained data (e.g., S3). For example, the terminal device uses the superimposed signal of the two received communication devices to subtract the recovered (S1*h1+S2*h2) to obtain the first data. This process can be understood as a successive interference cancellation (SIC) signal processing method.
上述示例中,终端装置也可以在步骤(1)中先解码出第一数据,之后在步骤(3)中再得到第二数据。方案与上述内容类似,不再赘述。In the above example, the terminal device can also decode the first data in step (1) and then obtain the second data in step (3). The scheme is similar to the above and will not be described again.
通过上述方案可以消除多个通信装置向终端装置发送的信号的干扰。而且上述干扰消除方法可以更好的从接收到的叠加信号中获取多个通信装置分别发送的数据。The above method can eliminate interference between signals transmitted from multiple communication devices to the terminal device. Furthermore, this interference cancellation method can better extract the data transmitted by each communication device from the received superimposed signals.
基于图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E、图1F或图1G、图2、图3、图4、图5、图6和图7所示的内容以及上述其他内容,图8示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的可能的流程示意图。为了便于理解,图8中以终端装置、第一通信装置、第二通信装置和第三通信装置的交互为例进行介绍。关于终端装置、第一通信装置、第二通信装置和第三通信装置的介绍可以参见前述图2的相关介绍,不再赘述。Based on the content shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F or 1G, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, and the other content mentioned above, Figure 8 exemplarily illustrates a possible flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application. For ease of understanding, Figure 8 uses the interaction of a terminal device, a first communication device, a second communication device, and a third communication device as an example. For a description of the terminal device, the first communication device, the second communication device, and the third communication device, please refer to the relevant description in Figure 2 above, which will not be repeated here.
步骤801,终端装置与第三通信装置建立RRC连接。Step 801: The terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device.
本申请实施例中,终端装置与第三通信装置建立RRC连接的过程中,终端装置可以先接收来自第三通信装置的同步信号(例如同步信号),继而与第三通信装置进行同步,之后再与第三通信装置建立RRC连接。In this embodiment of the application, during the process of establishing an RRC connection between the terminal device and the third communication device, the terminal device may first receive a synchronization signal (e.g., a synchronization signal) from the third communication device, then synchronize with the third communication device, and then establish an RRC connection with the third communication device.
本申请实施例中,终端装置可以与多个通信装置维持同步,但是终端装置可以与第三通信装置建立RRC连接,与其他通信装置无需建立RRC连接。例如,终端装接收第三通信装置的同步信号,继而与第三通信装置建立RRC连接,终端装置接收第二通信装置的同步信号,不与第二通信装置建立RRC连接。与终端装置建立RRC连接的通信装置也可以称为主通信装置(例如主卫星装置);其他没有与终端装置建立RRC连接的通信装置,但是终端装置维持了该通信装置的下行同步,这些通信装置可以称为辅通信装置(例如辅卫星装置)。由于终端装置只与第三通信装置建立RRC连接,因此该方案可以降低终端装置侧的方案复杂度。又由于终端装置可以与多个通信装置进行同步,因此终端装置可以对来自多个通信装置在相同资源上发送的数据进行解码,继而恢复出多个通信装置中每个通信装置发送的数据。In this embodiment, the terminal device can maintain synchronization with multiple communication devices, but it can establish an RRC connection with a third communication device without establishing RRC connections with other communication devices. For example, the terminal device receives the synchronization signal from the third communication device and then establishes an RRC connection with it. The terminal device receives the synchronization signal from the second communication device but does not establish an RRC connection with it. The communication device that establishes an RRC connection with the terminal device can also be called the primary communication device (e.g., the primary satellite device); other communication devices that do not establish an RRC connection with the terminal device, but whose downlink synchronization is maintained by the terminal device, can be called secondary communication devices (e.g., secondary satellite devices). Since the terminal device only establishes an RRC connection with the third communication device, this scheme can reduce the complexity of the scheme on the terminal device side. Furthermore, since the terminal device can synchronize with multiple communication devices, it can decode data sent from multiple communication devices on the same resources and then recover the data sent by each of the multiple communication devices.
步骤802,第三通信装置向终端装置发送第一配置信息。Step 802: The third communication device sends the first configuration information to the terminal device.
相对应的,终端装置接收第一配置信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first configuration information.
第一配置信息包括一个或多个通信装置的信息。例如第一配置信息可以包括第二通信装置的信息。例如,第一配置信息包括用于指示以下至少一项的信息:第一仰角范围、第一轨道角度范围、第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段、第一多普勒范围、第一多普勒率范围、第一TA范围、第一TA变化率范围,以及第二TA变化率范围。这些信息可以辅助终端装置判断第二通信装置当前是否为第一区域提供服务。例如这些信息可以辅助终端装置判断第一信息是否满足第一条件(参见前述图2提供的实施例的描述,不再赘述),继而为是否切换辅通信装置提供依据。The first configuration information includes information about one or more communication devices. For example, the first configuration information may include information about a second communication device. For example, the first configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range. This information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the second communication device is currently providing service to the first area. For example, this information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the first information meets a first condition (see the description of the embodiment provided in Figure 2 above, which will not be repeated here), thereby providing a basis for whether to switch to an auxiliary communication device.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第一配置信息还包括以下至少一项:第二通信装置的星历信息,以及地面参考点的位置信息。第一配置信息中的地面参考点的位置信息用于确定第二通信装置对应的仰角。这些信息可以辅助终端装置更为快速的搜索到第二通信装置的同步信号,以便提高通信效率。In another possible implementation, the first configuration information further includes at least one of the following: ephemeris information of the second communication device and position information of a ground reference point. The position information of the ground reference point in the first configuration information is used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device. This information can help the terminal device to search for the synchronization signal of the second communication device more quickly, thereby improving communication efficiency.
又例如,例如第一配置信息可以包括第一通信装置的信息。例如,第一配置信息包括用于指示以下至少一项的信息:第二仰角范围、第二轨道角度范围、第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段、第二多普勒范围、第二多普勒率范围、第二TA范围、第三TA变化率范围,以及第四TA变化率范围。这些信息可以辅助终端装置判断第一通信装置当前或未来(例如第一时长后)是否为第一区域提供服务。例如这些信息可以辅助终端装置判断第二信息是否满足第二条件(参见前述图2提供的实施例的描述,不再赘述),继而为是否切换辅通信装置提供依据。For example, the first configuration information may include information about the first communication device. For instance, the first configuration information includes information indicating at least one of the following: a second elevation angle range, a second orbital angle range, a time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area, a second Doppler range, a second Doppler rate range, a second TA range, a third TA rate of change range, and a fourth TA rate of change range. This information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the first communication device is currently or will be providing service to the first area in the future (e.g., after a first duration). For example, this information can assist the terminal device in determining whether the second information meets the second condition (see the description of the embodiment provided in Figure 2 above, which will not be repeated here), thereby providing a basis for whether to switch to the auxiliary communication device.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第一配置信息还包括以下至少一项:第一通信装置的星历信息,以及地面参考点的位置信息。第一配置信息中的地面参考点的位置信息用于确定第一通信装置对应的仰角。第一配置信息中的用于确定第一通信装置对应的仰角的地面参考点,与第一配置信息中的用于确定第二通信装置对应的仰角的地面参考点可以为同一个,或不同的两个地面参考点。这些信息可以辅助终端装置更为快速的搜索到第二通信装置的同步信号,以便提高通信效率。In another possible implementation, the first configuration information further includes at least one of the following: ephemeris information of the first communication device and location information of a ground reference point. The location information of the ground reference point in the first configuration information is used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device. The ground reference point used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the first communication device in the first configuration information and the ground reference point used to determine the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device in the first configuration information can be the same or two different ground reference points. This information can assist the terminal device in more quickly searching for the synchronization signal of the second communication device, thereby improving communication efficiency.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第一配置信息还可以包括各个通信装置(或候选辅通信装置,或待切换的辅通信装置)的优选级的信息。第一配置信息可以通过显示或隐式的方式指示各个通信装置的优先级。例如,第一配置信息中包括第一通信装置、第二通信装置和第四通信装置的优先级信息。第一配置信息指示第一通信装的优先级高于第二通信装置,第二通信装置的优先级高于第四通信装置。当终端装置确定需要将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置时,终端装置可以依据第一配置信息所指示的候选辅通信装置的优先级,选择优先级最高的候选辅通信装置,即选择第二通信装置。如果终端装置判断第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域,则终端装置将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置。如果终端装置判断第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域,或者第二通信装置目前不可用,则终端装置继续判断第四通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域。类似的,若第四通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域,则终端装置将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为第四通信装置。相关方案可以参见前述图2中关于优先级的描述,不再赘述。In another possible implementation, the first configuration information may further include information on the priority of each communication device (or candidate auxiliary communication device, or auxiliary communication device to be switched). The first configuration information may indicate the priority of each communication device explicitly or implicitly. For example, the first configuration information may include priority information for a first communication device, a second communication device, and a fourth communication device. The first configuration information indicates that the first communication device has a higher priority than the second communication device, and the second communication device has a higher priority than the fourth communication device. When the terminal device determines that it needs to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device, the terminal device may select the candidate auxiliary communication device with the highest priority, i.e., the second communication device, based on the priority of the candidate auxiliary communication devices indicated by the first configuration information. If the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area, the terminal device switches the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device. If the terminal device determines that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, or the second communication device is currently unavailable, the terminal device continues to determine whether the area served by the fourth communication device includes the first area. Similarly, if the area served by the fourth communication device includes the first area, the terminal device switches the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the fourth communication device. The relevant solutions can be found in the priority description in Figure 2 above, and will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第一配置信息还可以包括通信装置(例如第二通信装置和/或第一通信装置)的其他信息,例如通信装置的标识、下行同步参考信号序列信息)、下行同步信号频点、测量定时配置、极化信息等。这些信息可以辅助终端装置接收这些通信装置的同步信号,以便加快同步信号的搜索进程,继而提高通信效率。In another possible implementation, the first configuration information may further include other information about the communication devices (e.g., the second communication device and/or the first communication device), such as the identifier of the communication device, downlink synchronization reference signal sequence information, downlink synchronization signal frequency, measurement timing configuration, polarization information, etc. This information can assist the terminal device in receiving the synchronization signals from these communication devices, thereby accelerating the synchronization signal search process and improving communication efficiency.
步骤802可以不执行,第一配置信息中的相关内容也可以是预先配置在终端装置侧的,或预先由协议定义的。Step 802 may be omitted, and the relevant content in the first configuration information may be pre-configured on the terminal device side or pre-defined by the protocol.
步骤803,第一通信装置发送同步信号。Step 803: The first communication device sends a synchronization signal.
相对应的,终端装置接收来自第一通信装置的同步信号。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the first communication device.
第一通信装置的同步信号可以用于终端装置与第一通信装置定时同步。The synchronization signal of the first communication device can be used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the first communication device.
终端装置与主通信装置,即第三通信装置可以建立RRC连接。终端装置与辅通信装置(即第一通信装置)可以不建立RRC连接。The terminal device can establish an RRC connection with the main communication device, i.e., the third communication device. The terminal device can choose not to establish an RRC connection with the auxiliary communication device (i.e., the first communication device).
步骤803也可以不执行。当第一通信装置和第三通信装置需要在相同的资源(例如相同的时域和/或相同的频域资源)上向终端装置发送数据时,当该两个数据的下行定时大于第一阈值或等于第一阈值时,步骤803可以执行,以便终端装置与第一通信装置和第三通信装置均进行下行定时同步,继而可以从接收到的叠加信号中恢复出各个信号。可选择的,当该两个数据的下行定时小于第一阈值或等于第一阈值时,步骤803也可以不执行,终端装置与第三通信装置进行下行定时同步,继而可以接收信号。Step 803 may also be omitted. When the first communication device and the third communication device need to transmit data to the terminal device on the same resources (e.g., the same time domain and/or the same frequency domain resources), and when the downlink timing of the two data sets is greater than or equal to the first threshold, step 803 may be executed so that the terminal device can synchronize its downlink timing with both the first and third communication devices, thereby recovering the individual signals from the received superimposed signals. Alternatively, when the downlink timing of the two data sets is less than or equal to the first threshold, step 803 may also be omitted, and the terminal device can synchronize its downlink timing with the third communication device, thereby receiving signals.
步骤804,第三通信装置在第二资源上向终端装置发送数据,第一通信装置在第二资源上向终端装置发送数据。Step 804: The third communication device sends data to the terminal device on the second resource, and the first communication device sends data to the terminal device on the second resource.
相对应的,终端装置在第二资源上接收数据。终端装置在第二资源上接收的是第三通信装置和第一通信装置发送的数据的叠加数据。第二资源可以为时域资源,也可以为频域资源,或为时域和频域资源。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives data on the second resource. The data received by the terminal device on the second resource is the superimposed data sent by the third communication device and the first communication device. The second resource can be a time-domain resource, a frequency-domain resource, or a combination of both.
步骤804为一个示例,步骤804也可以不执行,终端装置将第一通信装置作为辅通信装置期间,第一通信装置可能没有与第三通信装置联合发送数据,第一通信装置可能没有向终端装置发送数据,或者第一通信装置可能是单独向终端装置发送数据,或者第三通信装置单独向终端装置发送数据。Step 804 is an example. Step 804 may also be omitted. During the period when the terminal device uses the first communication device as an auxiliary communication device, the first communication device may not send data jointly with the third communication device, the first communication device may not send data to the terminal device, or the first communication device may send data to the terminal device alone, or the third communication device may send data to the terminal device alone.
步骤805,终端装置获取第一信息,根据第一信息确定需要从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。Step 805: The terminal device obtains the first information and determines, based on the first information, that it needs to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
步骤805中,终端装置可以基于第一信息和第一配置信息,确定需要从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。例如,终端装置在确定第一信息满足第一条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置。又例如,终端装置在确定第一信息满足第一条件,且第二信息不满足第二条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置。又例如,终端装置在确定第一信息不满足第一条件或第二信息满足第二条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置不需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置。In step 805, the terminal device can determine, based on the first information and the first configuration information, that it needs to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device. For example, if the terminal device determines that the first information meets the first condition, it can determine that it needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device. Alternatively, if the terminal device determines that the first information meets the first condition and the second information does not meet the second condition, it can determine that it needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device. Yet another example, if the terminal device determines that the first information does not meet the first condition or the second information meets the second condition, it can determine that it does not need to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
步骤805的内容可以参见前述步骤201的相关描述,不再赘述。The content of step 805 can be found in the relevant description of step 201 above, and will not be repeated here.
步骤806,第三通信装置获取第三信息,根据第三信息确定终端装置需要从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。Step 806: The third communication device obtains third information and determines, based on the third information, that the terminal device needs to switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
第三通信装置确定终端装置是否需要切换辅通信装置的实施方式与终端装置侧执行的方案类似,可以参见前述实施方式A1和实施方式A2的描述。例如,第三通信装置基于第三信息中的内容判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置,例如第三通信装置在确定第三信息满足第一条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置。又例如,第三通信装置基于第三信息和第六信息中的内容判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置,例如第三通信装置在确定第三信息满足第一条件,且第六信息不满足第二条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置。The implementation method by which the third communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the auxiliary communication device is similar to the scheme executed on the terminal device side, and can be found in the descriptions of the aforementioned implementation methods A1 and A2. For example, the third communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the third information. For instance, if the third communication device determines that the third information meets the first condition, it can determine that the terminal device needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device. As another example, the third communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the third information and the sixth information. For instance, if the third communication device determines that the third information meets the first condition and the sixth information does not meet the second condition, it can determine that the terminal device needs to switch from the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
又例如,例如第三通信装置在确定第三信息不满足第一条件或第六信息满足第二条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置不需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置。For example, if the third communication device determines that the third information does not meet the first condition or the sixth information meets the second condition, the terminal device may determine that it does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device.
第三信息可以包括/替换为:用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域,或用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的信息。例如第三信息包括/为:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第二通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、第一时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。The third information may include/can be replaced by: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area. For example, the third information includes/is: information associated with the location of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device), and at least one of the following: information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the second communication device).
例如,第三通信装置可以根据终端装置的位置信息以及第二通信装置的位置信息获取第三信息。或者,第三通信装置根据接收到的来自第二通信装置的信号确定第三信息。或者,第三通信装置可以从终端装置或其他装置接收第三信息。又例如,第三通信装置获取第三信息的方式可以参见前述终端装置获取第一信息的方式的相关描述,不再赘述。For example, the third communication device can obtain the third information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the second communication device. Alternatively, the third communication device can determine the third information based on a signal received from the second communication device. Or, the third communication device can receive the third information from the terminal device or other devices. As another example, the method by which the third communication device obtains the third information can be found in the aforementioned description of the method by which the terminal device obtains the first information, and will not be repeated here.
第三通信装置获取的第三信息与终端装置获取的第一信息的类型可能相同,也可能不同。例如,第一信息可能包括时间信息,终端装置根据时间信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置;第三信息也包括时间信息,第三通信装置也根据时间信息判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。又例如,第一信息可能包括第二通信装置的仰角,终端装置根据第二通信装置的仰角判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置;第三信息包括时间信息,第三通信装置根据时间信息判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。The third information acquired by the third communication device may be the same type as or different from the first information acquired by the terminal device. For example, the first information may include time information, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the third information may also include time information, which the third communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device. As another example, the first information may include the elevation angle of the second communication device, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the third information may include time information, which the third communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
第三通信装置确定第三信息满足第一条件的方式,可以参见前述终端装置确定第一信息满足第一条件的方式,与之类似。第一条件的内容可以参见前述描述,不再赘述。The method by which the third communication device determines that the third information satisfies the first condition is similar to the method by which the terminal device determines that the first information satisfies the first condition. The content of the first condition is as described above and will not be repeated here.
例如,第三信息满足第一条件包括以下至少一项:第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围;第三信息中的时间信息指示的时间属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围;第三信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围。For example, the third information satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the third information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the third information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
第六信息可以包括/替换为:用于确定当前和/或未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域,或用于确定当前和/或未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的信息。第六信息可以是第三通信装置基于当前的第一通信装置的信息,并结合第一通信装置的星历信息推测出的,相关方案可以参见前述终端装置获取第二信息的方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The sixth information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after the first duration), or information for determining whether the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after the first duration) includes the first area. The sixth information may be inferred by the third communication device based on the current information of the first communication device and in combination with the ephemeris information of the first communication device. The relevant scheme can be referred to the aforementioned method of the terminal device obtaining the second information, which is similar and will not be repeated here.
例如第六信息包括/为:与第一通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第一通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、第一时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第一通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第一通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第一通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第一通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。For example, the sixth information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the first communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the first communication device), and information associated with the TA of the first communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the first communication device).
例如,第三通信装置可以根据终端装置的位置信息以及第一通信装置的位置信息获取第六信息。或者,第三通信装置根据接收到的来自第一通信装置的信号确定第六信息。或者,第三通信装置可以从终端装置或其他装置接收第六信息。又例如,第三通信装置获取第六信息的方式可以参见前述终端装置获取第二信息的方式的相关描述,不再赘述。For example, the third communication device can obtain the sixth information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the first communication device. Alternatively, the third communication device can determine the sixth information based on a signal received from the first communication device. Or, the third communication device can receive the sixth information from the terminal device or other devices. As another example, the method by which the third communication device obtains the sixth information can be found in the aforementioned description of how the terminal device obtains the second information, and will not be repeated here.
第三通信装置获取的第六信息与终端装置获取的第二信息的类型可能相同,也可能不同。例如,第二信息可能包括时间信息;第六信息也包括时间信息。又例如,第二信息可能包括第一通信装置的仰角;第六信息包括时间信息。The sixth information acquired by the third communication device may be the same type as or different from the second information acquired by the terminal device. For example, the second information may include time information; the sixth information may also include time information. As another example, the second information may include the elevation angle of the first communication device; the sixth information may include time information.
第三通信装置确定第六信息无法满足第二条件的方式,可以参见前述终端装置确定第二信息无法满足第二条件的方式,与之类似。第二条件的内容可以参见前述描述,不再赘述。The method by which the third communication device determines that the sixth information cannot satisfy the second condition is similar to the method described above for determining that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. The content of the second condition is as described above and will not be repeated here.
例如,第六信息无法满足第二条件包括以下至少一项;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的仰角(当前或第一时长后的仰角)不属于第一仰角范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的轨道角度(当前或第一时长后的轨道角度)不属于第一轨道角度范围;第六信息中的时间信息指示的时间(当前或第一时长后的时间)不属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒(当前或第一时长后的多普勒)不属于第一多普勒范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒率(当前或第一时长后的多普勒率)不属于第一多普勒率范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA(当前或第一时长后的TA)不属于第一TA范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率(当前或第一时长后的TA变化率)不属于第一TA变化率范围;第六信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率(当前或第一时长后的TA变化率的变化率)不属于第二TA变化率范围。For example, the sixth information may fail to meet the second condition if at least one of the following is true: the elevation angle (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the sixth information (current or after the first duration) does not fall within the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first Doppler rate range; the TA (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first TA range; the TA change rate (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the first TA change rate range; and the rate of change of the TA change rate (current or after the first duration) of the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not fall within the second TA change rate range.
步骤806的内容可以参见前述步骤201中终端装置确定需要切换辅通信装置的方案,与之类似,不再赘述。The content of step 806 can be found in the scheme of the terminal device determining the need to switch to the auxiliary communication device in step 201 above. It is similar and will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第三通信装置可以接收来自其他通信装置(例如终端装置)的信令,该信令用于通知第三通信装置终端装置切换至第二通信装置。In another possible implementation, the third communication device may receive signaling from other communication devices (e.g., terminal devices) to notify the third communication device that the terminal device has switched to the second communication device.
步骤807,第三通信装置向第二通信装置发送第二配置信息。Step 807: The third communication device sends the second configuration information to the second communication device.
相对应的,第二通信装置接收第二配置信息。Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the second configuration information.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二配置信息例如包括用于指示以下至少一项的信息:第一仰角范围、第一轨道角度范围、第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段、第一多普勒范围、第一多普勒率范围、第一TA范围、第一TA变化率范围,以及第二TA变化率范围。第二配置信息还包括:用于指示第一区域的信息。In one possible implementation, the second configuration information includes, for example, information indicating at least one of the following: a first elevation angle range, a first orbital angle range, a time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first region, a first Doppler range, a first Doppler rate range, a first TA range, a first TA rate of change range, and a second TA rate of change range. The second configuration information also includes information indicating the first region.
第二配置信息可以与第一区域关联。例如,第二配置信息还包括:用于指示第一区域的信息。用于指示第一区域的信息包括:第一区域内的波位信息,和/或,终端装置的位置信息。终端装置的位置信息例如可以包括终端装置所在位置在坐标系下的坐标,或者包括该终端装置的行政位置,例如位于哪个道路的几号等。波位可以理解为地面上划分的位置区域,波位信息例如可以包括用于标识波位的信息,例如波位的标识等。关于波位和区域的相关内容参见前述描述,不再赘述。The second configuration information can be associated with the first area. For example, the second configuration information also includes information for indicating the first area. Information for indicating the first area includes: wave position information within the first area, and/or, the location information of the terminal device. The location information of the terminal device may include, for example, the coordinates of the terminal device's location in a coordinate system, or the administrative location of the terminal device, such as its street number. A wave position can be understood as a defined location area on the ground; wave position information may include, for example, information for identifying the wave position, such as a wave position identifier. For details regarding wave positions and areas, please refer to the foregoing description, which will not be repeated here.
一种可能的实施方式中,第二配置信息用于第二通信装置确定向第一区域发送同步信号的时间。例如,当第二通信装置确定第二配置信息中的一项或多项被满足的情况下,可以开始向第一区域发送同步信号(或以第二时长为周期,周期性向第一区域发送同步信号)。又例如,当第二通信装置确定第二配置信息中的一项或多项无法被满足的情况下,第二通信装置可以停止向第一区域发送同步信号(或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,又例如第二通信装置可以以第三时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,第三时长可以大于第二时长)。可以看出,这些方案中,第二通信装置在第二配置信息的辅助下,可以控制向第一区域发送同步信号的数量和频率,不必一直持续高频率的向第一区域发送同步信号,该方案可以节省资源开销。In one possible implementation, the second configuration information is used by the second communication device to determine the timing for sending a synchronization signal to the first region. For example, when the second communication device determines that one or more of the second configuration information is satisfied, it can begin sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period). Alternatively, when the second communication device determines that one or more of the second configuration information cannot be satisfied, it can stop sending a synchronization signal to the first region (or stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first region with a second duration as the period; or, for example, the second communication device can periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region with a third duration as the period, where the third duration can be longer than the second duration). It can be seen that in these schemes, with the assistance of the second configuration information, the second communication device can control the number and frequency of synchronization signals sent to the first region, avoiding the need for continuously sending synchronization signals to the first region at a high frequency, thus saving resource overhead.
步骤808,第二通信装置获取第四信息,在第四信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,向第一区域发送同步信号。Step 808: The second communication device acquires fourth information, and if the fourth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, it sends a synchronization signal to the first area.
相对应的,终端装置接收来自第二通信装置的同步信号。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives a synchronization signal from the second communication device.
步骤808也可以替换为:第二通信装置获取第四信息,在第四信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,确定终端装置需切换至第二通信装置。第二通信装置确定终端装置需切换至第二通信装置的情况下,向第一区域发送同步信号,或开始以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。Step 808 can also be replaced by: the second communication device acquiring fourth information, and if the fourth information indicates that the area served by the second communication device includes the first area, determining that the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device. If the second communication device determines that the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device, it sends a synchronization signal to the first area, or begins periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration.
第二通信装置确定终端装置是否需要切换辅通信装置的实施方式与终端装置侧执行的方案类似,可以参见前述实施方式A1和实施方式A2的描述。例如,第二通信装置基于第四信息中的内容判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。例如第二通信装置在确定第四信息满足第一条件的情况下,可以向第一区域发送同步信号,或开始以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号(或可以确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置)。又例如,第二通信装置基于第四信息和第六信息中的内容判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置,例如第二通信装置在确定第四信息满足第一条件,且第七信息不满足第二条件的情况下,可以向第一区域发送同步信号,或开始以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号(或可以确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置)。The implementation method of the second communication device determining whether the terminal device needs to switch to the auxiliary communication device is similar to the scheme executed on the terminal device side, and can be found in the descriptions of the aforementioned implementation methods A1 and A2. For example, the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the fourth information. For example, if the second communication device determines that the fourth information meets the first condition, it may send a synchronization signal to the first area, or start periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (or determine that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device). As another example, the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to the second communication device based on the content of the fourth and sixth information. For example, if the second communication device determines that the fourth information meets the first condition and the seventh information does not meet the second condition, it may send a synchronization signal to the first area, or start periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (or determine that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device).
又例如,例如第二通信装置在确定第四信息不满足第一条件或第七信息满足第二条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置不需要将辅通信装置切换至第二通信装置,可以不向第一区域发送同步信号,或者不以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号(例如可以以第三时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号)。For example, if the second communication device determines that the fourth information does not meet the first condition or the seventh information meets the second condition, it can determine that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device to the second communication device, and may not send a synchronization signal to the first area, or may not periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration (for example, it may periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area with a third duration).
第四信息可以包括/替换为:用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域,或用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的信息。The fourth information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
例如第四信息包括/为:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第二通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、第一时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。For example, the fourth information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler and Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device), and information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA corresponding to the second communication device).
例如,第二通信装置可以根据终端装置的位置信息以及第二通信装置的位置信息获取第四信息。或者,第二通信装置根据接收到的来自其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)的信息确定第四信息。或者,第二通信装置可以从终端装置或其他装置接收第四信息。又例如,第二通信装置获取第四信息的方式可以参见前述终端装置获取第一信息的方式的相关描述,不再赘述。For example, the second communication device can obtain the fourth information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the second communication device. Alternatively, the second communication device can determine the fourth information based on information received from other communication devices (such as the third communication device). Or, the second communication device can receive the fourth information from the terminal device or other devices. As another example, the method by which the second communication device obtains the fourth information can be found in the aforementioned description of the method by which the terminal device obtains the first information, and will not be repeated here.
第二通信装置获取的第四信息与终端装置获取的第一信息的类型可能相同,也可能不同。例如,第一信息可能包括时间信息,终端装置根据时间信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置;第四信息也包括时间信息,第二通信装置也根据时间信息判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。又例如,第一信息可能包括第二通信装置的仰角,终端装置根据第二通信装置的仰角判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置;第四信息包括时间信息,第二通信装置根据时间信息判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。The fourth information acquired by the second communication device may be the same type as or different from the first information acquired by the terminal device. For example, the first information may include time information, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fourth information may also include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device. As another example, the first information may include the elevation angle of the second communication device, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fourth information may include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
第二通信装置确定第四信息满足第一条件的方式,可以参见前述终端装置确定第一信息满足第一条件的方式,与之类似。第一条件的内容可以参见前述描述,不再赘述。The method by which the second communication device determines that the fourth information satisfies the first condition is similar to the method by which the terminal device determines that the first information satisfies the first condition. The content of the first condition can be found in the foregoing description and will not be repeated here.
例如,第四信息满足第一条件包括以下至少一项;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的轨道角度属于第一轨道角度范围;第四信息中的时间信息指示的时间属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒属于第一多普勒范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率属于第一多普勒率范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA属于第一TA范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率属于第一TA变化率范围;第四信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率属于第二TA变化率范围。For example, the fourth information satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fourth information belongs to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fourth information belongs to the second TA change rate range.
第七信息可以包括/替换为:用于确定当前和/或未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域,或用于确定当前和/或未来(例如第一时长后)第一通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的信息。第七信息可以是第二通信装置基于当前的第一通信装置的信息,并结合第一通信装置的星历信息推测出的,相关方案可以参见前述终端装置获取第二信息的方式,与之类似,不再赘述。The seventh information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration), or information for determining whether the area where the first communication device provides services currently and/or in the future (e.g., after a first duration) includes the first area. The seventh information may be inferred by the second communication device based on the current information of the first communication device and in conjunction with the ephemeris information of the first communication device. Similar schemes can be found in the aforementioned method for the terminal device to obtain the second information, and will not be elaborated further.
例如第七信息包括/为:与第一通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第一通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、第一时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第一通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第一通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第一通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第一通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。For example, the seventh information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the first communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the first communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the first communication device (e.g., the Doppler corresponding to the first communication device and the Doppler rate), and information associated with the TA of the first communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA corresponding to the first communication device, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA).
例如,第二通信装置可以根据终端装置的位置信息以及第一通信装置的位置信息获取第七信息。或者,第二通信装置根据接收到的来自其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)的信息确定第七信息。或者,第二通信装置可以从终端装置或其他装置接收第七信息。又例如,第二通信装置获取第七信息的方式可以参见前述终端装置获取第二信息的方式的相关描述,不再赘述。For example, the second communication device can obtain the seventh information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the first communication device. Alternatively, the second communication device can determine the seventh information based on information received from other communication devices (such as the third communication device). Or, the second communication device can receive the seventh information from the terminal device or other devices. For further examples, the method by which the second communication device obtains the seventh information can be found in the aforementioned description of how the terminal device obtains the second information, and will not be repeated here.
第二通信装置获取的第七信息与终端装置获取的第二信息的类型可能相同,也可能不同。例如,第二信息可能包括时间信息;第七信息也包括时间信息。又例如,第二信息可能包括第一通信装置的仰角;第七信息包括时间信息。The type of the seventh information acquired by the second communication device may be the same as or different from the type of the second information acquired by the terminal device. For example, the second information may include time information; the seventh information may also include time information. As another example, the second information may include the elevation angle of the first communication device; the seventh information may include time information.
第二通信装置确定第七信息无法满足第二条件的方式,可以参见前述终端装置确定第二信息无法满足第二条件的方式,与之类似。第二条件的内容可以参见前述描述,不再赘述。The method by which the second communication device determines that the seventh information cannot satisfy the second condition is similar to the method described above for determining that the second information cannot satisfy the second condition. The content of the second condition is as described above and will not be repeated here.
例如,第七信息无法满足第二条件包括以下至少一项:第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的仰角(当前或第一时长后的仰角)不属于第一仰角范围;第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的轨道角度(当前或第一时长后的轨道角度)不属于第一轨道角度范围;第七信息中的时间信息指示的时间(当前或第一时长后的时间)不属于第一通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒(当前或第一时长后的多普勒)不属于第一多普勒范围;第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的多普勒率(当前或第一时长后的多普勒率)不属于第一多普勒率范围;第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA(当前或第一时长后的TA)不属于第一TA范围;第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率(当前或第一时长后的TA变化率)不属于第一TA变化率范围;第七信息指示的第一通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率(当前或第一时长后的TA变化率的变化率)不属于第二TA变化率范围。For example, the seventh information failing to meet the second condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the seventh information (current or after the first duration) does not belong to the time period during which the first communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first Doppler rate range; the TA (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first TA range; the TA change rate (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate (current or after the first duration) corresponding to the first communication device indicated by the seventh information does not belong to the second TA change rate range.
步骤808的内容可以参见前述步骤201中终端装置确定需要切换辅通信装置的方案,与之类似,不再赘述。The content of step 808 can be found in the scheme of the terminal device determining the need to switch to the auxiliary communication device in step 201 above. It is similar and will not be repeated here.
步骤808、步骤806和步骤805之间的可以没有先后关系,可以是同时执行,也可以是不同时执行,图8中给出的是一种可能的示例,实际应用中,有可能是步骤808或步骤806在步骤805之前执行,或者步骤805在步骤808和步骤806之间执行,又或者步骤806在步骤808之后执行等。Steps 808, 806, and 805 may not have a sequential relationship; they may be executed simultaneously or not simultaneously. Figure 8 shows one possible example. In actual applications, steps 808 or 806 may be executed before step 805, or step 805 may be executed between steps 808 and 806, or step 806 may be executed after step 808, etc.
一种可能的实施方式中,在步骤808中,当第二通信装置向第一区域发送同步信号时,终端装置可以开始接收来自第二通信装置的同步信号。又一种可能的实施方式中,当第二通信装置向第一区域发送同步信号,且终端装置确定需要切换至第二通信装置,终端装置可以开始接收来自第二通信装置的同步信号。如此,可以节省终端装置的电量。In one possible implementation, in step 808, when the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first area, the terminal device can begin receiving the synchronization signal from the second communication device. In another possible implementation, when the second communication device sends a synchronization signal to the first area, and the terminal device determines that it needs to switch to the second communication device, the terminal device can begin receiving the synchronization signal from the second communication device. This saves power on the terminal device.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置可以接收来自其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)的信令,该信令用于通知第二通信装置开始向第一区域发送同步信号,或者通知第二通信装置向第一区域以第二时长为周期周期性发送同步信号。又一种可能的实施方式中,第二通信装置可以接收来自其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)的信令,该信令用于通知第二通信装置停止向第一区域发送同步信号,或者通知第二通信装置停止向第一区域以第二时长为周期周期性发送同步信号,或者通知第二通信装置开始向第一区域以第三时长为周期周期性发送同步信号。In another possible implementation, the second communication device may receive signaling from other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to notify the second communication device to begin sending a synchronization signal to the first area, or to periodically send a synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration. In yet another possible implementation, the second communication device may receive signaling from other communication devices (e.g., a third communication device) to notify the second communication device to stop sending a synchronization signal to the first area, or to stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area for a second duration, or to begin periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area for a third duration.
步骤809,终端装置切换至第二通信装置。Step 809: The terminal device switches to the second communication device.
步骤809可以包括终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。步骤809可以替换为以下至少一项:停止接收来自第一通信装置的同步信号;接收来自第二通信装置的同步信号,第二通信装置的同步信号用于终端装置与第二通信装置定时同步。Step 809 may include the terminal device switching from the first communication device to the second communication device. Step 809 may be replaced by at least one of the following: stopping receiving synchronization signals from the first communication device; receiving synchronization signals from the second communication device, wherein the synchronization signals from the second communication device are used for timing synchronization between the terminal device and the second communication device.
步骤809的内容可以参见前述步骤202的描述,不再赘述。The content of step 809 can be found in the description of step 202 above, and will not be repeated here.
步骤810,第三通信装置在第一资源向终端装置发送第二数据。Step 810: The third communication device sends the second data to the terminal device from the first resource.
步骤810的内容可以参见前述步骤203的描述,不再赘述。The content of step 810 can be found in the description of step 203 above, and will not be repeated here.
步骤811,第二通信装置在第一资源向终端装置发送第一数据。Step 811: The second communication device sends the first data to the terminal device from the first resource.
相对应的,终端装置在第一资源上接收第一数据和第二数据。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives first data and second data on the first resource.
步骤811的内容可以参见前述步骤204的描述,不再赘述。The content of step 811 can be found in the description of step 204 above, and will not be repeated here.
步骤812,终端装置获取第一数据和第二数据。Step 812: The terminal device acquires the first data and the second data.
步骤812的内容可以参见前述步骤205的描述,不再赘述。The content of step 812 can be found in the description of step 205 above, and will not be repeated here.
步骤813,第二通信装置获取第五信息,在第五信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下:停止向第一区域发送同步信号或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。Step 813: The second communication device obtains the fifth information. If the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area, then: stop sending synchronization signals to the first area or stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area for a second duration.
步骤813也可以替换为:第二通信装置获取第五信息,在第五信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下,确定终端装置需从第二通信装置切换为其他辅通信装置。第二通信装置确定终端装置需从第二通信装置切换为其他辅通信装置的情况下,停止向第一区域发送同步信号,或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。Step 813 can also be replaced by: the second communication device acquiring the fifth information, and if the fifth information indicates that the area served by the second communication device does not include the first area, determining that the terminal device needs to switch from the second communication device to another auxiliary communication device. If the second communication device determines that the terminal device needs to switch from the second communication device to another auxiliary communication device, it stops sending synchronization signals to the first area, or stops periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration.
第二通信装置停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号可以替换为:以第三时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。第三时长大于第二时长。The second communication device's cessation of periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration can be replaced by periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a third duration, where the third duration is longer than the second duration.
第二通信装置确定终端装置是否需要切换辅通信装置的实施方式与终端装置侧执行的方案类似,可以参见前述实施方式A1的描述。例如,第二通信装置基于第五信息中的内容判断终端装置是否需从第二通信装置切换为其他辅通信装置。例如第二通信装置在确定第五信息不满足第一条件的情况下,停止向第一区域发送同步信号或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。又例如,例如第二通信装置在确定第五信息满足第一条件的情况下,可以确定终端装置不需要将辅通信装置从第二通信装置切换为其他通信装置,可以继续以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。The implementation method by which the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch to an auxiliary communication device is similar to the scheme executed on the terminal device side, as described in the aforementioned implementation method A1. For example, the second communication device determines whether the terminal device needs to switch from the second communication device to another auxiliary communication device based on the content of the fifth information. For example, if the second communication device determines that the fifth information does not meet the first condition, it stops sending synchronization signals to the first area or stops periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration. Alternatively, if the second communication device determines that the fifth information meets the first condition, it can determine that the terminal device does not need to switch the auxiliary communication device from the second communication device to another communication device, and can continue to periodically send synchronization signals to the first area with a second duration.
第五信息可以包括/替换为:用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域,或用于确定第二通信装置提供服务的区域是否包括第一区域的信息。The fifth piece of information may include/be replaced by: information for determining the area where the second communication device provides services, or information for determining whether the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area.
例如第五信息包括/为:与第二通信装置的位置关联的信息(例如第二通信装置的仰角和/或轨道角度)、第一时间信息(例如当前时间的信息),与第二通信装置的信号的多普勒关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的多普勒、多普勒率),以及与第二通信装置的TA关联的信息(例如第二通信装置对应的TA、TA变化率,以及TA变化率的变化率中的至少一项)中的至少一项。For example, the fifth information includes/is at least one of the following: information associated with the position of the second communication device (e.g., the elevation angle and/or orbital angle of the second communication device), first time information (e.g., current time information), information associated with the Doppler of the signal of the second communication device (e.g., the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device, the Doppler rate), and information associated with the TA of the second communication device (e.g., at least one of the TA corresponding to the second communication device, the rate of change of TA, and the rate of change of the rate of change of TA).
例如,第二通信装置可以根据终端装置的位置信息以及第二通信装置的位置信息获取第五信息。或者,第二通信装置根据接收到的来自其他通信装置(例如第三通信装置)的信息确定第五信息。或者,第二通信装置可以从终端装置或其他装置接收第五信息。又例如,第二通信装置获取第五信息的方式可以参见前述终端装置获取第一信息的方式的相关描述,不再赘述。For example, the second communication device can obtain the fifth information based on the location information of the terminal device and the location information of the second communication device. Alternatively, the second communication device can determine the fifth information based on information received from other communication devices (such as the third communication device). Or, the second communication device can receive the fifth information from the terminal device or other devices. As another example, the method by which the second communication device obtains the fifth information can be found in the aforementioned description of the method by which the terminal device obtains the first information, and will not be repeated here.
第二通信装置获取的第五信息与终端装置获取的第一信息的类型可能相同,也可能不同。例如,第一信息可能包括时间信息,终端装置根据时间信息判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置;第五信息也包括时间信息,第二通信装置也根据时间信息判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。又例如,第一信息可能包括第二通信装置的仰角,终端装置根据第二通信装置的仰角判断是否需要切换至第二通信装置;第五信息包括时间信息,第二通信装置根据时间信息判断终端装置是否需要切换至第二通信装置。The fifth piece of information acquired by the second communication device may be the same type as or different from the first piece of information acquired by the terminal device. For example, the first piece of information may include time information, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fifth piece of information may also include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device. As another example, the first piece of information may include the elevation angle of the second communication device, which the terminal device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device; the fifth piece of information may include time information, which the second communication device uses to determine whether to switch to the second communication device.
例如,第五信息不满足第一条件包括以下至少一项:第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的仰角不属于第一仰角范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的轨道角度不属于第一轨道角度范围;第五信息中的时间信息指示的时间不属于第二通信装置为第一区域提供服务的时间段;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒不属于第一多普勒范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的多普勒率不属于第一多普勒率范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA不属于第一TA范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率不属于第一TA变化率范围;第五信息指示的第二通信装置对应的TA变化率的变化率不属于第二TA变化率范围。For example, the fifth information not satisfying the first condition includes at least one of the following: the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first elevation angle range; the orbital angle corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first orbital angle range; the time indicated by the time information in the fifth information does not belong to the time period during which the second communication device provides service to the first area; the Doppler corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first Doppler range; the Doppler rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first Doppler rate range; the TA corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first TA range; the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the first TA change rate range; and the change rate of the TA change rate corresponding to the second communication device indicated by the fifth information does not belong to the second TA change rate range.
第一条件的内容可以参见前述图2提供的实施例的相关描述,不再赘述。The content of the first condition can be found in the relevant description of the embodiment provided in Figure 2 above, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中以第二通信装置为例,介绍了第三通信装置向第二通信装置发送第二配置信息,第二通信装置向终端装置发送数据,以及第二通信装置确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号的过程。类似的,针对其他辅通信装置,例如第一通信装置,也可以执行与第二通信装置类似的过程。举个例子,例如,第三通信装置可以向第一通信装置发送配置信息(该配置信息可以与第二配置信息类似),第一通信装置向终端装置发送数据(例如前述步骤804),第一通信装置也可以确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号或停止以一个时长(例如第二时长)为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号(该步骤可以参考前述步骤813第二通信装置侧的方案,与之类似,不再赘述)。This application embodiment uses a second communication device as an example to describe the process of a third communication device sending second configuration information to the second communication device, the second communication device sending data to the terminal device, and the second communication device determining to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area or to stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area for a second duration. Similarly, for other auxiliary communication devices, such as the first communication device, a similar process to that of the second communication device can be performed. For example, the third communication device can send configuration information (which can be similar to the second configuration information) to the first communication device, the first communication device can send data to the terminal device (e.g., the aforementioned step 804), and the first communication device can also determine to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area or to stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first area for a duration (e.g., the second duration) (this step can refer to the scheme on the second communication device side in the aforementioned step 813, which is similar and will not be described again).
上述方案描述了终端装置将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为第二通信装置的过程。后续终端装置可能还会将辅通信装置从第二通信装置切换为其他通信装置,方案与之类似,不再赘述。通过图8提供的方案可以看出,第二通信装置可以根据一些信息确定同步信号的发送时间和发送频率。举个例子,第二通信装置对应的仰角属于第一仰角范围的情况下,第二通信装置可以开始(或以第二时长为周期周期性)向第一区域发送同步信号。又例如,第二通信装置对应的仰角不属于第一仰角范围的情况下,第二通信装置可以停止(或停止以第二时长为周期周期性)向第一区域发送同步信号(例如可以以第三时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号)。该方式可以使第二通信装置不必持续以高频率向第一区域发送同步信号,从而可以节省资源开销,且降低通信系统的信号干扰。The above scheme describes the process by which a terminal device switches its auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to the second communication device. Subsequent terminal devices may switch the auxiliary communication device from the second communication device to other communication devices, with similar schemes, which will not be elaborated further. As shown in Figure 8, the second communication device can determine the transmission time and frequency of the synchronization signal based on certain information. For example, if the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device is within the first elevation angle range, the second communication device can start (or periodically transmit the synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration). Conversely, if the elevation angle corresponding to the second communication device is not within the first elevation angle range, the second communication device can stop (or stop periodically transmitting the synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration) (for example, it can periodically transmit the synchronization signal to the first area with a third duration). This method allows the second communication device to avoid continuously transmitting the synchronization signal to the first area at a high frequency, thereby saving resource consumption and reducing signal interference in the communication system.
又一种可能的实施方式中,第一通信装置也可以执行如第二通信装置的方案。例如第一通信装置可以在确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置设置为第一通信装置的情况下,开始向第一区域发送同步信号或开始以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。第一通信装置也可以在确定终端装置需要将辅通信装置从第一通信装置切换为其他通信装置的情况下,停止向第一区域发送同步信号或停止以第二时长为周期周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。In another possible implementation, the first communication device may also perform the same scheme as the second communication device. For example, the first communication device may start sending a synchronization signal to the first area or start periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration if it determines that the terminal device needs to set the auxiliary communication device as the first communication device. The first communication device may also stop sending a synchronization signal to the first area or stop periodically sending a synchronization signal to the first area with a second duration if it determines that the terminal device needs to switch the auxiliary communication device from the first communication device to another communication device.
本申请实施例中第三通信装置需要发送的信息(比如第一配置信息、第二配置信息等)可以承载于系统信息块(system information block,SIB)1、其他系统消息(other system information,OSI)、主系统信息块(mater information block,MIB)等的广播信息中的至少一种,由第三通信装置向终端装置广播或组播发送。如此可以避免为了发送上述信令而对不同终端装置调度不同资源,从而可以节省调度资源的信令开销和降低系统调度复杂度。In this embodiment, the information that the third communication device needs to send (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.) can be carried in at least one of the broadcast information of system information block (SIB) 1, other system information (OSI), and main system information block (MIB), and broadcast or multicast to the terminal device by the third communication device. This avoids scheduling different resources for different terminal devices to send the above signaling, thereby saving the signaling overhead of resource scheduling and reducing the complexity of system scheduling.
又一种可能的实施方式中,如果第三通信装置在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)建立连接阶段以及后续通信过程中发送信息(比如第一配置信息、第二配置信息等),则这些信息可以承载于RRC信令(例如,RRC建立(RRC setup)消息、RRC重配信令(RRC reconfiguration)、RRC恢复信令(RRC resume)等)、下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)、组DCI、介质访问控制(media access control,MAC)控制元素(control element,CE)中的至少一种,这些信息可以通过信令或通过表格方式进行指示。或者第三通信装置需要发送的信息(比如第一配置信息、第二配置信息等)可以随数据传输或在单独分配的物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)中承载。第三通信装置需要指示的信息(比如第一配置信息、第二配置信息等)可以通过单播或组播发送。如此,可以灵活控制每个/每组终端装置对应的这些信息。In another possible implementation, if the third communication device sends information (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.) during the radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment phase and subsequent communication, this information can be carried in at least one of the following: RRC signaling (e.g., RRC setup message, RRC reconfiguration message, RRC resume message, etc.), downlink control information (DCI), group DCI, and media access control (MAC) control element (CE). This information can be indicated by signaling or by tables. Alternatively, the information that the third communication device needs to send (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.) can be carried with data transmission or in a separately allocated physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH). The information that the third communication device needs to indicate (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, etc.) can be sent via unicast or multicast. In this way, this information corresponding to each/group of terminal devices can be flexibly controlled.
可以理解的是,为了实现上述实施例中功能,第三通信装置、第二通信装置、第一通信装置和终端装置可以包括执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本申请中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及方法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件相结合的形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用场景和设计约束条件。It is understood that, in order to achieve the functions described in the above embodiments, the third communication device, the second communication device, the first communication device, and the terminal device may include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. Those skilled in the art should readily recognize that, based on the units and method steps of the various examples described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed in this application, this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application scenario and design constraints of the technical solution.
基于相同构思,图9、图10和图11为本申请的实施例提供的可能的通信装置的结构示意图。图9、图10和图11所示的这些通信装置可以用于实现上述方法实施例中终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置的功能,因此也能实现上述方法实施例所具备的有益效果。在本申请的实施例中,该通信装置可以是如图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E、图1F或图1G所示的终端设备,也可以是如图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E、图1F或图1G所示的网络设备(比如卫星装置,或部署于地面的网络设备),还可以是应用于图1A、图1B、图1C、图1D、图1E、图1F或图1G所示的终端设备或网络设备的芯片(或芯片系统)。Based on the same concept, Figures 9, 10, and 11 are schematic diagrams of possible communication devices provided in embodiments of this application. These communication devices shown in Figures 9, 10, and 11 can be used to implement the functions of the terminal device, third communication device, or second communication device in the above method embodiments, and therefore can also achieve the beneficial effects of the above method embodiments. In the embodiments of this application, the communication device can be a terminal device as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, or 1G; it can also be a network device (such as a satellite device or a network device deployed on the ground) as shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, or 1G; or it can be a chip (or chip system) applied to the terminal device or network device shown in Figures 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, 1F, or 1G.
如图9所示,通信装置1300包括处理单元1310和收发单元1320。通信装置1300用于实现上述图2或图8中所示的方法实施例中终端装置、第三通信装置或第二通信装置的功能。收发单元1320也可以称为通信单元。收发单元1320可以包括发送单元和接收单元。As shown in Figure 9, the communication device 1300 includes a processing unit 1310 and a transceiver unit 1320. The communication device 1300 is used to implement the functions of the terminal device, the third communication device, or the second communication device in the method embodiments shown in Figure 2 or Figure 8. The transceiver unit 1320 can also be referred to as a communication unit. The transceiver unit 1320 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于获取第一信息,在第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to acquire first information, and when the first information indicates that the area provided by the second communication device includes the first area, switch from the first communication device to the second communication device.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于接收第一数据和第二数据。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive first data and second data.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第一信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定第一信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to determine, when the first information satisfies the first condition, that the area in which the first information indicates the second communication device to provide services includes the first area.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于接收第一配置信息。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive first configuration information.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置之前,获取第二信息,确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain second information before switching from the first communication device to the second communication device, and determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第二信息无法满足第二条件的情况下,确定第二信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the second information does not include the first area when the second information cannot meet the second condition.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于停止接收来自第一通信装置的同步信号。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to stop receiving the synchronization signal from the first communication device.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中终端装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于接收来自第二通信装置的同步信号。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive a synchronization signal from the second communication device.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于获取第三信息,在第三信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,确定终端装置从第一通信装置切换至第二通信装置。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain third information, and when the third information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, it determines that the terminal device switches from the first communication device to the second communication device.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于在第一资源向终端装置发送第二数据,第一资源还用于第二通信装置向终端装置发送第一数据。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send second data to the terminal device from the first resource, and the first resource is also used for the second communication device to send first data to the terminal device.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第三信息满足第一条件的情况下,确定第三信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to determine, when the third information satisfies the first condition, that the area in which the third information indicates the second communication device to provide services includes the first area.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于发送第一配置信息。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send first configuration information.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于向第二通信装置发送第二配置信息。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send second configuration information to the second communication device.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于获取第六信息,确定第六信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain sixth information and determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第三通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第六信息无法满足第二条件的情况下,确定第六信息指示的第一通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the third communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to determine that the area provided by the first communication device indicated by the sixth information does not include the first area if the sixth information cannot satisfy the second condition.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于获取第四信息,在第四信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域包括第一区域的情况下,通过收发单元1320用于向第一区域发送同步信号。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to acquire fourth information, and when the fourth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services includes the first area, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send a synchronization signal to the first area.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于在第一资源向终端装置发送第一数据。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to send first data to the terminal device in the first resource.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第四信息满足第一条件的情况下,通过收发单元1320用于向第一区域发送同步信号When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to send a synchronization signal to the first area through the transceiver unit 1320 when the fourth information satisfies the first condition.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于获取第五信息,在第五信息指示第二通信装置提供服务的区域不包括第一区域的情况下,确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to obtain fifth information and determine to stop sending synchronization signals to the first area if the fifth information indicates that the area where the second communication device provides services does not include the first area.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第五信息不满足第一条件的情况下,确定停止向第一区域发送同步信号。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to determine to stop sending the synchronization signal to the first area if the fifth information does not meet the first condition.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于停止向第一区域发送同步信号;停止以第二时长为周期,周期性向第一区域发送同步信号。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to stop sending synchronization signals to the first region; and to stop periodically sending synchronization signals to the first region with a second duration.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,处理单元1310用于在第五信息不满足第一条件的情况下,通过收发单元1320以第三时长为周期,周期性向第一区域发送同步信号,第三时长大于第二时长。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the processing unit 1310 is used to periodically send a synchronization signal to the first region through the transceiver unit 1320 with a third duration as the period when the fifth information does not meet the first condition, and the third duration is longer than the second duration.
当通信装置1300用于实现图2或图8所示的方法实施例中第二通信装置的功能时,一种可能的实施方式中,收发单元1320用于接收第二配置信息。When the communication device 1300 is used to implement the function of the second communication device in the method embodiment shown in FIG2 or FIG8, in one possible implementation, the transceiver unit 1320 is used to receive the second configuration information.
有关上述处理单元1310和收发单元1320更详细的描述可以参考图2或图8所示的方法实施例中相关描述。For a more detailed description of the processing unit 1310 and the transceiver unit 1320 described above, please refer to the relevant descriptions in the method embodiments shown in Figure 2 or Figure 8.
如图10所示,通信装置1400包括处理器1410和接口电路1420。处理器1410和接口电路1420之间相互耦合。可以理解的是,接口电路1420可以为收发器或输入输出接口。其中输入输出接口用于输入和/或输出信息,输出可以理解为发送,输入可以理解为接收。可选的,通信装置1400还可以包括存储器1430,用于存储处理器1410执行的指令或存储处理器1410运行指令所需要的输入数据或存储处理器1410运行指令后产生的数据。As shown in Figure 10, the communication device 1400 includes a processor 1410 and an interface circuit 1420. The processor 1410 and the interface circuit 1420 are coupled to each other. It is understood that the interface circuit 1420 can be a transceiver or an input/output interface. The input/output interface is used for inputting and/or outputting information; output can be understood as sending, and input can be understood as receiving. Optionally, the communication device 1400 may also include a memory 1430 for storing instructions executed by the processor 1410, or storing input data required by the processor 1410 to execute instructions, or storing data generated after the processor 1410 executes instructions.
当通信装置1400用于实现图2或图8所示的方法时,处理器1410用于实现上述处理单元1310的功能,接口电路1420用于实现上述收发单元1320的功能。When the communication device 1400 is used to implement the method shown in FIG2 or FIG8, the processor 1410 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1310, and the interface circuit 1420 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1320.
请参阅图11,图11所示的通信装置也可以为一种基带的可能的架构示意图。如图11所示,该通信装置可以包括处理系统,该处理系统可以包括一个或多个处理器,处理器可以用于执行进程,例如图11中所示的进程#1…进程#N。Please refer to Figure 11. The communication device shown in Figure 11 can also be a schematic diagram of a possible baseband architecture. As shown in Figure 11, the communication device may include a processing system, which may include one or more processors. The processors can be used to execute processes, such as process #1...process #N shown in Figure 11.
处理系统可以用总线体系结构实现,通常由总线表示。总线可以包括任何数量的互连总线和桥,这取决于处理系统的具体应用和总体设计约束。总线通信地将各种电路耦合在一起,包括一个或多个处理器(通常由处理器表示)、存储器和计算机可读介质(通常由计算机可读介质表示,例如图11中所示的计算机可读介质#1…计算机可读介质#N。)。总线还可以链接各种其他电路,如定时源、外设、电压调节器和电源管理电路,这些电路在本领域中是众所周知的,因此,将不再进一步描述。总线接口提供总线和收发器之间以及总线和接口之间的接口。A processing system can be implemented using a bus architecture, typically represented by a bus. A bus can include any number of interconnect buses and bridges, depending on the specific application and overall design constraints of the processing system. The bus communicatively couples various circuits together, including one or more processors (typically represented by a processor), memory, and computer-readable media (typically represented by computer-readable media, such as computer-readable media #1…computer-readable media #N shown in Figure 11). The bus can also link various other circuits, such as timing sources, peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art and therefore will not be described further. The bus interface provides the interface between the bus and transceivers, and between the bus and the interface.
通信装置还可以包括收发器(图11中未示出),收发器也可以替换为接口电路或通信接口等。收发器提供用于通过无线传输介质与各种其他装置通信的通信接口或装置。收发器可以耦合到天线阵列,并且收发器和天线阵列可以一起用于与相应的网络类型通信。至少一个接口(例如,网络接口和/或用户接口)提供通信接口或装置,用于通过内部总线或经由外部传输介质。The communication device may also include a transceiver (not shown in Figure 11), which may be replaced by interface circuitry or a communication interface, etc. The transceiver provides a communication interface or means for communicating with various other devices via a wireless transmission medium. The transceiver may be coupled to an antenna array, and the transceiver and antenna array may be used together for communication with a corresponding network type. At least one interface (e.g., a network interface and/or a user interface) provides a communication interface or means for communication via an internal bus or via an external transmission medium.
处理器负责管理总线和一般处理,包括执行存储在计算机可读介质上的软件。当由处理器执行该软件时,该软件使处理系统执行下面针对任何特定设备所描述的各种功能。处理器、存储器和计算机可读介质可实现的功能可以包括:编码、解码、速率匹配、解速率匹配、加扰、解扰、调制、解调、层映射、快速傅里叶变换(fast fourier transform,FFT)、逆快速傅里叶变换(inverse fast fourier transform,IFFT)、离散傅里叶逆变换(inverse discrete fourier transform,IDFT)、预编码、资源元素(resource element,RE)映射、信道均衡、解RE映射、数字波束成形(beam forming,BF)、添加CP、去CP等等中的一项或多项。The processor is responsible for managing the bus and general processing, including executing software stored on a computer-readable medium. When the processor executes the software, it causes the processing system to perform the various functions described below for any particular device. Functions that can be implemented by the processor, memory, and computer-readable medium may include: encoding, decoding, rate matching, rate dematching, scrambling, descrambling, modulation, demodulation, layer mapping, fast Fourier transform (FFT), inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT), inverse discrete Fourier transform (IDFT), precoding, resource element (RE) mapping, channel equalization, RE demapping, digital beamforming (BF), adding CP, removing CP, and one or more of the following.
本申请实施例中涉及到的信令(比如第一配置信息、第二配置信息、第一数据、第二数据)可以由处理器、存储器和计算机可读介质可实现。例如,第三通信装置(例如卫星装置)向终端装置发送的上述信令,由图11中的处理器、存储器和计算机可读介质对上述参数进行处理后,向终端装置发送。The signaling involved in the embodiments of this application (such as first configuration information, second configuration information, first data, and second data) can be implemented by a processor, a memory, and a computer-readable medium. For example, the aforementioned signaling sent by a third communication device (such as a satellite device) to a terminal device is processed by the processor, memory, and computer-readable medium shown in FIG11 after processing the aforementioned parameters, and then sent to the terminal device.
当图11所示的通信装置用于实现图2或图8所示的方法时,处理器1410用于实现上述处理单元1310的功能,接口电路1420用于实现上述收发单元1320的功能。When the communication device shown in FIG11 is used to implement the method shown in FIG2 or FIG8, the processor 1410 is used to implement the function of the processing unit 1310, and the interface circuit 1420 is used to implement the function of the transceiver unit 1320.
当上述通信装置(例如图9、图10或图11所示的通信装置)为应用于终端的芯片时,该终端芯片实现上述方法实施例中终端装置的功能。该终端芯片接收来自基站的信息,可以理解为该信息是先由终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收到的,然后再由这些模块发送给终端芯片。该终端芯片向基站发送信息,可以理解为该信息是先发送给终端中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线),然后再由这些模块向基站发送。When the aforementioned communication device (e.g., the communication device shown in Figures 9, 10, or 11) is a chip applied to a terminal, the terminal chip implements the functions of the terminal device in the above method embodiments. The terminal chip receives information from a base station, which can be understood as the information being first received by other modules in the terminal (such as an RF module or antenna), and then sent to the terminal chip by these modules. The terminal chip sends information to the base station, which can be understood as the information being first sent to other modules in the terminal (such as an RF module or antenna), and then sent to the base station by these modules.
当上述通信装置(例如图9、图10或图11所示的通信装置)为应用于基站(例如卫星基站)的芯片时,该基站芯片实现上述方法实施例中网络装置的功能。该基站芯片接收来自终端的信息,可以理解为该信息是先由基站中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线)接收到的,然后再由这些模块发送给基站芯片。该基站芯片向终端发送信息,可以理解为该信息是下发送给基站中的其它模块(如射频模块或天线),然后再由这些模块向终端发送。When the aforementioned communication device (e.g., the communication device shown in Figures 9, 10, or 11) is a chip applied to a base station (e.g., a satellite base station), the base station chip implements the functions of the network device in the above method embodiments. The base station chip receives information from the terminal, which can be understood as the information being first received by other modules in the base station (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), and then sent to the base station chip by these modules. The base station chip sends information to the terminal, which can be understood as the information being sent down to other modules in the base station (such as radio frequency modules or antennas), and then sent to the terminal by these modules.
在本申请中,实体A向实体B发送信息,可以是A直接向B发送,也可以是A经过其它实体间接地向B发送。同样的,实体B接收来自实体A的信息,可以是实体B直接接收实体A发送的信息,也可以是实体B通过其它实体间接地接收实体A发送的信息。这里的实体A和B可以是RAN节点或终端,也可以是RAN节点或终端内部的模块。信息的发送与接收可以是RAN节点与终端之间的信息交互,例如,基站与终端之间的信息交互;信息的发送与接收也可以是两个RAN节点之间的信息交互,例如CU和DU之间的信息交互;信息的发送与接收还可以是在一个装置内部不同模块之间的信息交互,例如,终端芯片与终端其它模块之间的信息交互,或者,基站芯片与该基站中其它模块之间的信息交互。In this application, entity A sends information to entity B, either directly or indirectly through other entities. Similarly, entity B receives information from entity A, either directly or indirectly through other entities. Entities A and B can be RAN nodes or terminals, or modules within RAN nodes or terminals. Information transmission and reception can be between RAN nodes and terminals, such as between a base station and a terminal; between two RAN nodes, such as between a CU and a DU; or between different modules within a single device, such as between a terminal chip and other modules of the terminal, or between a base station chip and other modules of the base station.
可以理解的是,本申请的实施例中的处理器(例如图10中的处理器1410和/或图11中的处理系统中的处理器)可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU),还可以是其它通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其它可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件,硬件部件或者其任意组合。通用处理器可以是微处理器,也可以是任何常规的处理器。It is understood that the processor in the embodiments of this application (e.g., processor 1410 in FIG. 10 and/or the processor in the processing system in FIG. 11) may be a Central Processing Unit (CPU), or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以在硬件中实现,也可以在可由处理器执行的软件指令中实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器、闪存、只读存储器、可编程只读存储器、可擦除可编程只读存储器、电可擦除可编程只读存储器、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于基站或终端中。处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于基站或终端中。The method steps in the embodiments of this application can be implemented in hardware or in software instructions executable by a processor. The software instructions can consist of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, erasable programmable read-only memory, electrically erasable programmable read-only memory, registers, hard disks, portable hard disks, compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or any other form of storage medium well known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to a processor, enabling the processor to read information from and write information to the storage medium. The storage medium can also be a component of the processor. The processor and storage medium can reside in an ASIC. Alternatively, the ASIC can reside in a base station or terminal. The processor and storage medium can also exist as discrete components in a base station or terminal.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘;还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘。该计算机可读存储介质可以是易失性或非易失性存储介质,或可包括易失性和非易失性两种类型的存储介质。In the above embodiments, implementation can be achieved, in whole or in part, through software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented, in whole or in part, as a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer programs or instructions. When a computer program or instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions of the embodiments of this application are performed. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, a network device, a user equipment, or other programmable device. The computer program or instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transferred from one computer-readable storage medium to another. For example, a computer program or instructions can be transferred from one website, computer, server, or data center to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired or wireless means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that integrates one or more available media. The available medium can be a magnetic medium, such as a floppy disk, hard disk, or magnetic tape; it can also be an optical medium, such as a digital video optical disc; or it can be a semiconductor medium, such as a solid-state drive. The computer-readable storage medium may be a volatile or non-volatile storage medium, or may include both types of storage media.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified or in case of logical conflict, the terminology and/or descriptions of different embodiments are consistent and can be referenced by each other. The technical features of different embodiments can be combined to form new embodiments according to their inherent logical relationship.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;在本申请的公式中,字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。“包括A,B或C中的至少一个”可以表示:包括A;包括B;包括C;包括A和B;包括A和C;包括B和C;包括A、B和C。In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "more than one" means two or more. "And/or" describes the relationship between related objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. For example, A and/or B can represent: A alone, A and B simultaneously, or B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. In the textual description of this application, the character "/" generally indicates an "or" relationship between the preceding and following related objects; in the formulas of this application, the character "/" indicates a "division" relationship between the preceding and following related objects. "Including at least one of A, B, or C" can mean: including A; including B; including C; including A and B; including A and C; including B and C; including A, B, and C.
可以理解的是,在本申请的实施例中涉及的各种编号(比如数字编号“第一”“第二”,再比如字母编号“实施方式A1”、“实施方式A1.1”、“实施方式C1”等)仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。It is understood that the various numbers involved in the embodiments of this application (such as the numerical numbers "first" and "second", and the letter numbers "implementation A1", "implementation A1.1", "implementation C1", etc.) are only for the convenience of description and are not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of this application. The order of the above-mentioned process numbers does not imply the order of execution; the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic.
Claims (60)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410516629.5 | 2024-04-26 | ||
| CN202410516629.5A CN120857202A (en) | 2024-04-26 | 2024-04-26 | Communication method, device, storage medium and computer program product |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025223020A1 true WO2025223020A1 (en) | 2025-10-30 |
Family
ID=97413148
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/078893 Pending WO2025223020A1 (en) | 2024-04-26 | 2025-02-24 | Communication method and apparatuses, storage medium, and computer program product |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN120857202A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025223020A1 (en) |
-
2024
- 2024-04-26 CN CN202410516629.5A patent/CN120857202A/en active Pending
-
2025
- 2025-02-24 WO PCT/CN2025/078893 patent/WO2025223020A1/en active Pending
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN120857202A (en) | 2025-10-28 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20230179294A1 (en) | User equipment and base station | |
| JP2023523171A (en) | User equipment and base stations | |
| JP2023536968A (en) | Apparatus and method for determining whether user equipment is located within a registration area | |
| CN116017600A (en) | Cell switching method, terminal equipment, network equipment and storage medium | |
| WO2025223020A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatuses, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| US20250016705A1 (en) | Common timing advance determination for a non-terrestrial network | |
| CN119316894A (en) | A switching method and a communication device | |
| WO2025213968A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| WO2025223019A1 (en) | Communication method and device, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| EP4586718A1 (en) | Communication device, communication method, and communication system | |
| CN121217179A (en) | A communication method, apparatus, storage medium, and computer program product | |
| CN120379059A (en) | Communication method, apparatus, readable storage medium and computer program product | |
| WO2025076699A1 (en) | Communication method, apparatus, readable storage medium, and computer program product | |
| WO2025059995A1 (en) | Communication method, and apparatus | |
| WO2025228175A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| WO2025076700A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus, readable storage medium and computer program product | |
| WO2025246497A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus, and storage medium and computer program product | |
| WO2025252076A1 (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2025065652A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
| CN120692668A (en) | Communication method and device | |
| WO2025256436A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| CN121013089A (en) | Communication method and related device | |
| WO2025223238A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025223273A1 (en) | Communication method and related apparatus | |
| WO2025107557A9 (en) | Signal sending method and apparatus |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 25793218 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |